New Product Digital Temperature Controller E5@C/E5@C-T E5@C Series That Pursues Greater Visibility with Large White PV Display. Introducing Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks for Unified Panel Solutions. Reduce Required Wiring Work. A Wide Lineup of Models to Meet a Wide Range of User Needs. Digital Temperature Controllers: E5@C Series 48 x 24 mm 48 x 48 mm Models with Screw Terminal Blocks/ Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks E5GC page 2 Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5CC page 18 Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks E5CC-B page 18 Plug-in Models E5CC-U page 18 Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5EC page 40 Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks E5EC-B page 40 Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5AC page 40 Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5DC page 58 Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks E5DC-B page 58 48 x 96 mm 96 x 96 mm DIN 22.5-mm-wide Controllers That Mount to DIN Track Programmable Digital Temperature Controllers: E5@C-T Series 48 x 48 mm Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5CC-T page 78 48 x 96 mm Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5EC-T page 96 96 x 96 mm Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5AC-T page 96 1 Digital Temperature Controller E5GC (48 x 24 mm) Easy Operation and High Performance of the E5@C Series in a Compact 48 x 24mm Body * A compact body of 48 x 24 x 90 mm (W x H x D) that is ideal for small equipment, laboratory instruments, and others. * White PV display with a height of 10.5 mm for high visibility even with the compact body. * Removable terminal block to simplify maintenance. Select from screw terminal blocks or screwless clamp terminal blocks for the wiring method. * High-speed sampling at 50 ms. * Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. * Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). * * CSAconformance evaluationbyUL. 48 x 24 mm Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5GC-@6 48 x 24 mm Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks E5GC-@C Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable safety standards. Refer to Safety Precautions on 122. Main I/O Functions Sensor Input Universal input * Thermocouple * Pt * Analog current/voltage E5GC Dual displays: PV/SV Control Output 1 * Relay output * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Linear current output Indication Accuracy * Thermocouple input: 0.3% of PV * Pt input: 0.2% of PV * Analog input: 0.2% of FS Sampling Period * 50 ms Event Inputs * None *1 *2 Serial Communications * None * RS-485 4-digit displays * PF (shift) Key * Temperature status display * Simple programming * Independent heating and cooling PID control * Changed parameter display * Display brightness setting * Simple transfer output (only on models with liner current outputs) * Work Bit Message Auxiliary Outputs * None *1 *2 This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175) 2 E5GC Model Number Legend and Standard Models Model Number Legend E5GC-@@ @ @ @ M-@@@ (Example: E5GC-RX1A6M-015) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F Model A B Control No. of outputs 1 auxiliary and 2 outputs C Power supply voltage D E F Terminal type Input type Options Meaning 48 x 24 mm E5GC Control output 1 Relay output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output RX QX *1 CX *2 0 1 2 A D 6 C M *3 *3, *4 *5 000 015 016 023 024 Control output 2 None None None None 1 2 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Screw terminal blocks (with cover) Screwless clamp terminal blocks *6 Universal input HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Event inputs --------RS-485 ------1 1 --------2 *1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output. *2. Only option 000 can be selected if an auxiliary output is zero. *3. Option 016 and 023 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected. *4. Option with HB and HS alarms (023) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output. *5. Option 024 can be selected only if one auxiliary output is selected. *6. The specifications are different for Temperature Controllers with Push-In Plus terminal blocks. Refer to Precautions when Wiring on page 131. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 3 E5GC Optional Products (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2 Communications Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2-E Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. This Cable is used to connect to the bottom-panel Setup Tool port. Current Transformers (CTs) Hole diameter 5.8 mm 5.8 mm 12.0 mm 12.0 mm Model E54-CT1 E54-CT1L* E54-CT3 E54-CT3L* *Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use these CTs. Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-53 (2pcs) Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. 4 Waterproof Packing Model Y92S-P12 Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Draw-out Jig Model Y92F-55 CX-Thermo Support Software Model EST2-2C-MV4 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher is required for the E5GC. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com). Terminal Covers (for E5GC-@6) Model E53-COV27 Note: This Terminal Covers is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. E5GC Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage Operating voltage range Power consumption Sensor input Input impedance Control method Relay output Control output Auxiliary output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output Number of outputs Output specifications Number of inputs Event input External contact input specifications Setting method Indication method Multi SP Bank switching Other functions Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Storage temperature Altitude Recommended fuse Installation environment * There are up to four event inputs. A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage 5.9 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 3.2 VA max. at 24 VAC or 1.8 W max. at 24 VDC Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.) ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) Output voltage 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: Approx. 10,000 1 or 2 (depends on model) SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value) 1 or 2 (depends on model) Contact input ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact Digital setting using front panel keys 11-segment digital displays and individual indicators Character height: PV: 10.5 mm, SV: 5.0 mm Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or serial communications. * None Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, and work bit message -10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: -10 to 50C with standard mounting (with no condensation or icing) 25 to 85% -25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing) 2,000 m max. T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1) 5 E5GC Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs) Sensor type Platinum resistance thermometer Sensor specification Pt100 Infrared temperature sensor Thermocouple JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B C/W PLII 10 to 70C 60 to 120C 115 to 165C 120 165 140 to 260C 2300 2300 1800 1800 1700 1700 1700 1600 1500 Temperature range (C) 1400 1300 1300 1300 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 850 850 850 800 700 600 600 500.0 500 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 300 200 100.0 100 Set value 90 100 0.0 -100 -200 100.0 -200 -199.9 0 1 0.0 -199.9 2 3 -20.0 -100 -20.0 6 7 8 -200 4 5 0 0 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 -100 -200 -199.9 -200 9 10 11 -200 -199.9 -200 12 13 14 15 18 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Analog input Input type Input specification Setting range Set value 6 Current Voltage 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V Usable in the following ranges by scaling: -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9, -19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999 25 26 27 28 0 to 10 V 29 E5GC Alarm Types Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (See note.) Auxiliary outputs are allocated to alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed. To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1. Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON * 2 1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this SP deviation range. Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm X X 2 ON ON Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the OFF PV OFF PV (default) SP SP SP by the deviation or more. Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the X X ON ON 3 Lower-limit alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than OFF PV OFF PV SP SP the SP by the deviation or more. Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H Upper- and lower-limit limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON *3 4 OFF PV range *1 lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this SP deviation range. Set value 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Alarm type Upper- and lower-limit with ON OFF standby sequence *1 *5 Upper-limit with standby ON OFF sequence L Lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF X Absolute-value upperlimit ON OFF Absolute-value lower-limit ON OFF Absolute-value upperlimit with standby sequence ON OFF Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 12 13 LBA (alarm 1 type only) PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute-value upper-limit alarm ON OFF SP absolute-value lower-limit alarm ON OFF 15 H X SP SP PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 ON OFF 16 X 0 PV A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6 PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6 X SP X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV ON OFF SP ON OFF X 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upperlimit alarm (8). *6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lowerlimit alarm (9). *6 X 0 SP X 0 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is lower than the alarm value (X). Standard Control X MV 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. *7 *8 SP ON OFF X 0 MV X MV 0 Standard Control ON OFF 17 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X). Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV) ON OFF MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm *9 X - Standard Control MV absolute-value upper-limit alarm *9 A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit alarm (1). *6 *4 PV SP Standard Control X MV 0 Always ON ON OFF X 0 MV This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X). Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV) ON OFF X 0 MV Always ON 7 E5GC *1. With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as "L" and "H." *2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Case 3 (Always OFF) Case 2 Case 1 H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| H SP L H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| L SP SP H L H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range Case 3 (Always ON) Case 2 Case 1 H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| SP L H H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L L SP SP H L 8 H<0, L>0 |H| |L| H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above at *2 * In cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if the upperand lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. * In case 3, the alarm is always OFF. *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit alarm with standby sequence The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby sequence. *7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the LBA. *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm. *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolutevalue upper-limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation. E5GC Characteristics Indication accuracy (at the temperature of 23C) Simple transfer output accuracy Influence of temperature *3 Influence of voltage *3 Influence of EMS. (at EN 61326-1) Input sampling period Hysteresis Proportional band (P) Integral time (I) Derivative time (D) Proportional band (P) for cooling Integral time (I) for cooling Derivative time (D) for cooling Control period Manual reset value Alarm setting range Influence of signal source resistance Insulation resistance Thermocouple: (0.3 % of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.*1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2 % of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. 0.3% FS max.*2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 1% FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. 50 ms Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) -1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100 max.), Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10 max.) 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) 100 to 240 VAC: 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Dielectric strength 24 VAC/DC: 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Weight Controller: Approx. 80 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g x 2 Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher E5GC side panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect a USB port on the computer. *6 Setup Tool port E5GC bottom panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable are used together to connect a USB port on the computer. *6 cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some Approved standards models only.) *7, EAC Standards Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM EMI: EN61326-1 *8 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN61326-1 *8 ESD Immunity: EN61000-4-2 EMC Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN61000-4-5 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN61000-4-11 *1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is 1% FS max. *3. Ambient temperature: -10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage *4. K thermocouple at -100C max.: 10C max. *5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter. *6. External serial communications (RS-485) and USB-Serial Conversion Cable communications can be used at the same time. *7. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models. *8. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2) 9 E5GC Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Conforms to USB Specification 2.0 38,400 bps Computer: USB (Type A plug) Connector Digital Temperature Controller: Special serial specifications connector Power supply Bus power (Supplied from the USB host controller) *2 Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current 450 mA max. consumption 4.70.2 VDC (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Output voltage Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) 250 mA max. (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Output current Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ambient operating 0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) temperature Ambient operating 10% to 80% humidity Storage temperature -20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 120 g Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries. *1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. *2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Applicable OS Applicable software Applicable models USB interface standard DTE speed Communications Specifications Transmission line connection method Communications Synchronization method Protocol Baud rate * Transmission code Data bit length * Stop bit length * RS-485: Multidrop RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Start-stop synchronization CompoWay/F, or Modbus 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 57,600 bps ASCII 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Block check character (BCC) Error detection with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 with Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications 0 to 99 ms response wait time Default: 20 ms * The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Communications Functions You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The E5@C automatically performs communications with PLCs. No communications programming is required. Programless Number of connected Digital Temperature communica- Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series) Applicable PLCs tions OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series, NJ Series, or NX1P Mitsubishi Electric PLCs MELSEC Q Series, L Series, FX3 Series, or iQ-R Series KEYENCE PLCs KEYENCE KV Series When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as Component the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that Communiare set as slaves. cations Slope and offsets can be set for the set point. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (including master) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, the parameters can be copied from the Digital Copying * Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation. * Both the programless communications and the component communications support the copying. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings E54-CT1 E54-CT1L E54-CT3 E54-CT3L Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g Weight E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g E54-CT3 Only Accessories Armatures (2) None Plugs (2) Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms CT input (for heater current detection) Maximum heater current Input current indication accuracy Heater burnout alarm setting range *1 Models with detection for single-phase heaters: One input 50 A AC 5% FS 1 digit max. 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) SSR failure alarm setting Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms range *2 *4 *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). *2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Control Output Relay (Reference Values) Life (x 104 operations) USB-Serial Conversion Cable 500 300 200 100 E5GC 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cos = 1 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 Switching current (A) 10 E5GC External Connections E5GC Control Outputs E5GC-@ @ @ @ @ M - @ @ @ Relay output 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) (6) Terminal type Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 The E5GC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) wil occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Relay outputs 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) (6) Options 015 Communications (RS-485) 023 Event input 1 CT input Event inputs 1 and 2 CT EV1 Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. 024 EV2 (-) RS-485 B(+) 016 (-) EV1 A(-) 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 7 9 8 9 (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input - TC 10 11 12 (3) Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC 1 24 VAC/DC 2 1 + 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 Pt (no polarity) 4 5 B A + mA I 10 11 12 10 11 12 - B V - V + 10 11 12 6 (2) Auxiliary Outputs Auxiliary output 1 (1) Control Outputs RX QX Relay output R Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output Q C CX + - + 9 - 5 3 4 3 4 3 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Auxiliary output 2 4 6 Auxiliary output 1 5 6 Auxiliary output 1 Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3 crimped terminals. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams Sensor input and CT input Communications and event inputs Power supply Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated. 11 E5GC Terminal Block Appearance E5GC-@C Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks E5GC-@6 Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks (M3 Screws) Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminals Blocks Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks * Wire stripping length: 8 to 12 mm * Ferrules: 8 to 12 mm * Terminal type: Forked or round crimped terminals * Tightening torque for all terminals: 0.43 to 0.58 N*m 0.8 to 1.4 mm 5.8 mm max. 8 to 12 mm 8 to 12 mm 5.8 mm max. Wires:AWG24 to AWG18 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.21 to 0.82 mm2) braided or solid wires Note: Refer to Precautions When Wiring E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks) on page 132 for information on wiring Controllers with screwless clamp terminal blocks. Nomenclature E5GC Front panel Left Side View of the E5GC Left-panel Setup Tool port No. 1 display Temperature unit PV or specified parameter No.2 display SP or specified parameter value Bottom View of E5GC Operation indicators Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level. Use the U D Keys to set the parameter. Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to the Initial Setting Level. Bottom-panel Setup Tool port Use the M Key to change to another parameter. 12 Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). E5GC Dimensions (Unit: mm) Controllers E5GC-@6 Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks 63.6 48 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P12 (also available for ordering separately)) Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-53 (also available for ordering separately)) Terminal Cover (Accessory, E53-COV27 (also available for ordering separately)) 90 44.8 4 1 22 40.8 24 22 * Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left. * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the side panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Mounted Separately Horizontally Group Mounted L1 To mount the Temperature Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the Waterproof Packing onto the Temperature Controller. Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. 22.2+0.3 0 40 min 45+0.60 L1=(48xn-2.5) 22.2+0.3 0 +1.0 +0 n: Number of mounted Controllers (2 n 6) * To install the Temperature Controller, insert it into a square hole in a panel with a thickness of 1 to 8 mm, and then insert the enclosed adapter so that it locks into the grooves on the top and bottom or on the left and right of the rear case. * Tighten the two mounting screws on the top and bottom or on the right and left of the Mounting Adapters alternately little by little to maintain a balance, and tighten them to a torque of between 0.29 and 0.39 N*m. * When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature range given below. Horizontal group mounting: -10 to 55C * Use Temperature Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks for vertical group mounting. E5GC-@C Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P12 (also available for ordering separately)) Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-53 (also available for ordering separately)) 63.6 48 4 93 44.8 1 22 40.8 24 22 * Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left. * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the side panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Mounted Separately Horizontally Group Mounted Vertically Group Mounted 45 L1 +0.6 +0 22.2+0.3 0 40 min 45+0.60 L1=(48xn-2.5) +1.0 +0 n: Number of mounted Controllers (2 n 6) 22.2+0.3 0 L2 To mount the Temperature Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the Waterproof Packing onto the Temperature Controller. Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. L2=(24xn-1.5) +1.0 +0 * To install the Temperature Controller, insert it into a square hole in a panel with a thickness of 1 to 8 mm, and then insert the enclosed adapter so that it locks into the grooves on the top and bottom or on the left and right of the rear case. * Tighten the two mounting screws on the top and bottom or on the right and left of the Mounting Adapters alternately little by little to maintain a balance, and tighten them to a torque of between 0.29 and 0.39 N*m. * When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature range given below. Horizontal group mounting: -10 to 55C Vertical group mounting of two Controllers: -10 to 45C Vertical group mounting of three or more Controllers: -10 to 40C * If you use vertical group mounting, you cannot draw out the interior body of the Controller. 13 E5GC Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable (2110) E58-CIFQ2 250 263 1510 LED (RD) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED (PWR) LED (SD) Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable (2110) (1510) 250 263 1510 E58-CIFQ2 (Order separately) Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. Conversion Cable Current Transformers E54-CT1 21 Filler (epoxy) 15 5.8 dia. 7.5 Case 25 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L 2.8 Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 182 2.5 40 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 10.5 10 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 100V Frequency: 50 Hz 1k 10 Distortion factor 10% 1 3% 1% 100mV 100 10 RL=10 1 E54-CT1L 21 8 100V 15 10 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) Cable (AWG18) 1155 (12) Shrinkable tube Case (PBT) 5.8 dia. 25 Mark (yellow) Filler (epoxy) 2.5 10.5 40 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 14 10 E5GC E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 30 Filler (epoxy) 12 dia. 9 Case (PBT) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 80.8 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 40 x 40 15 40 8 Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3 Accessories * Armature 30 Connection Example Approx. 3 dia. 100V Frequency: 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 1k 500 10 1 100mV 100 50 10 RL=10 Armature Plug Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L 1 Lead 100V 10 1 18 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) * Plug Approx. 6 dia. (22) E54-CT3L 8 30 1005 Cable (AWG18) Case (PBT) 12.0 dia. Filler (epoxy) 40 40 15 Two, M3 (depth: 4) 8 30 15 E5GC Mounting Adapter Y92F-53 (Two provided.) One pair is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it becomes lost or damaged. 34.7 12 11.8 9.4 Waterproof Packing Y92S-P12 The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection. (Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider three years a rough standard.) Draw-out Jig Y92F-55 Use this Draw-out Jig to remove the interior body of the Digital Temperature Controller from the case to perform maintenance without removing the terminal wiring. 32.9 15 1.4 30.5 27.4 22 28.7 20 23 Terminal Covers E53-COV27 The Terminal Covers is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Order the Terminal Covers separately if it becomes lost or damaged. 2.5 1.45 44.7 21.9 16 Terminal Covers (E53-COV27) MEMO 17 Digital Temperature Controller E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U (48 x 48 mm) Large White PV Display That's Easier to Read. Easy to Use, from Model Selection to Setup and Operation. Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks Added to Lineup. * * CSA conformance evaluation by UL. * The white PV display with a height of 15.2 mm improves visibility. * High-speed sampling at 50 ms. * Select from models with screw terminal blocks, models with 48 x 48 mm 48 x 48 mm 48 x 48 mm Screw Terminal Push-In Plus Plug-in Models Push-In Plus terminal blocks for reduced wiring work, and Blocks Terminal Blocks E5CC-U E5CC E5CC-B Plug-in Models that can be removed from the terminal block. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on * Short body with depth of only 60 mm. (Screw Terminal Blocks) applicable safety standards. * Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Refer to Safety Precautions on 122. Use component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each other. * Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). Main I/O Functions E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Sensor Input Universal input * Thermocouple * Pt * Analog current/voltage Dual displays: PV/SV Control Output 1 * Relay output * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Linear current output Indication Accuracy * Thermocouple input 0.3%PV 1%PV * Pt input: 0.2% of PV * Analog input: 0.2% of FS Control Output 2 * None * None * Voltage output (for driving SSR) Sampling Period * 50 ms Event Inputs * None * None * None *2 *2 *4 Remote SP Input * None * None *1 Serial Communications * None * None * RS-485 4-digit displays * PF (shift) Key * Temperature status display * Simple programming * Independent heating and cooling PID control * Changed parameter display * Display brightness setting Auxiliary Outputs *3 * 2 Transfer Output * None *1 * None *1 *2 * None This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175) 18 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Model Number Legend and Standard Models Model Number Legend Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5CC-@@ 3 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5CC-RX3A5M-000) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F A Model Control outputs 1 and 2 B C D No. of Power Terminal auxiliary supply type outputs voltage E F Input type Options Meaning 48 x 48 mm Control output 1 Relay output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output *2 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CC RX QX *1 *3 CX QQ Linear current output *2 CQ 3 A D 5 M *1 000 001 *1 003 *3 004 005 006 007 Control output 2 None None None Voltage output (for driving SSR) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 3 (one common) 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Screw terminal blocks (with cover) Universal input Event Remote Transfer HB alarm and Communications HS alarm inputs SP Input output ----------1 --2 ----2 (for 3-phase RS-485 ------heaters) --RS-485 2 --------4 --------2 Provided. ----2 Provided. --- *1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001 and 003) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output. *2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output. *3. Option 004 can be selected only when "CX" is selected for the control outputs. Note: Draw-out-type models of the E5CC are available. Ask your OMRON representative for details. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling. (It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.) B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 19 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Model Number Legend Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks E5CC-@@ 2 @ B M -@@@ (Example: E5CC-RX2ABM-000) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F A Model Control outputs 1 and 2 B C D No. of Power Terminal auxiliary supply type outputs voltage E F Input type Options Meaning 48 x 48 mm Control output 1 Control output 2 RX Relay output None Voltage output QX None (for driving SSR) *1 CX Linear current output *2 None 2 2 (one common) A 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC/DC B Push-in plus terminal blocks M Universal input Event Remote Transfer HB alarm and Communications HS alarm inputs SP Input output 000 ----------*1 001 1 --2 ----*1 002 1 RS-485 ------004 --RS-485 2 ----006 ----2 --Provided. *1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001, 002) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output. *2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output. E5CC Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 20 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Model Number Legend Plug-in Models E5CC-@@ @ @ U M -000 A B C D E (Example: E5CC-RW0AUM-000) F A B C D Control No. of Power Model Terminal outputs auxiliary supply type 1 and 2 outputs voltage E5CC E F Input type Options Meaning 48 x 48 mm Control output 1 Control output 2 Relay output (SPDT) None Voltage output (for driving SSR) None Linear current output * None None 1 2 (one common) 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Plug-in model Universal input HB alarm and HS CommuniRemote SP Transfer Event inputs alarm cations Input output ----------- RW QX CX 0 1 2 A D U M 000 * The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in May 2014 or later. List of Models Options Control output No. of auxiliary outputs HB alarm and HS alarm No. of event inputs Communications --Relay output Voltage output (for driving SSR) 1 --- --- --- Model Power supply voltage Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC E5CC-RW0AUM-000 E5CC-RW0DUM-000 E5CC-RW1AUM-000 E5CC-RW1DUM-000 2 E5CC-RW2AUM-000 E5CC-RW2DUM-000 --- E5CC-QX0AUM-000 E5CC-QX0DUM-000 1 --- --- --- 2 --Linear current output Model 1 --- 2 --- --- E5CC-QX1AUM-000 E5CC-QX1DUM-000 E5CC-QX2AUM-000 E5CC-QX2DUM-000 E5CC-CX0AUM-000 E5CC-CX0DUM-000 E5CC-CX1AUM-000 E5CC-CX1DUM-000 E5CC-CX2AUM-000 E5CC-CX2DUM-000 Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 21 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Optional Products (Order Separately) Front Covers USB-Serial Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2 Type Hard Front Cover Soft Front Cover Terminal Covers (for E5CC) CX-Thermo Support Software Model E53-COV17 E53-COV23 (3pcs) Note: The E53-COV10 cannot be used. Refer to page 33 for the mounted dimensions. Waterproof Packing Model Y92S-P8 Note: The Waterproof Packing is provided only with E5CC/E5CC-B Controllers. The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof Packing is attached. Current Transformers (CTs) Hole diameter 5.8 mm 5.8 mm 12.0 mm 12.0 mm Model E54-CT1 E54-CT1L * E54-CT3 E54-CT3L * LeadwiresareincludedwiththeseCTs.IfULcertificationisrequired,use theseCTs. Adapter Model Y92F-45 Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for an E5B@ Controller. Waterproof Cover Model Y92A-48N Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-49 Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. DIN Track Mounting Adapter (for E5CC) Model Y92F-52 Sockets (for E5CC-U) Type Front-connecting Socket Front-connecting Socket with Finger Protection Back-connecting Socket Terminal Cover for Back-connecting socket with Finger Protection 22 Model Y92A-48H Y92A-48D Model P2CF-11 P2CF-11-E P3GA-11 Y92A-48G Model EST2-2C-MV4 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher is required for the E5CC. CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5CC-U. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5CC-B. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com). E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage Operating voltage range Power consumption Sensor input Input impedance Control method Relay output Control output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC 85% to 110% of rated supply voltage Models with option selection of 000:5.2 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 3.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 1.6 W max. at 24 VDC All other models: 6.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V,or 0 to 50 mV (The 0 to 50 mV range applies to the E5CC-U only for those manufactured in May 2014 or later.) Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.) ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) E5CC/E5CC-B: SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) E5CC-U: SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000 E5CC: 3 Number of outputs E5CC-B: 2 E5CC-U: 1 or 2 (depends on model) Auxiliary SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 1 output: 3 A (resistive load), E5CC-U models with 2 output outputs: 3 A (resistive load), E5CC-B models with 2 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Models with 3 Output specifications outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value) E5CC: 2 or 4 (depends on model) Number of inputs E5CC-B: 2 (depends on model) Event Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. input *1 External contact input Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. specifications Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output) Transfer Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000 output *1 Output specifications Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., resolution: Approx. 10,000 Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 150 max.) Remote SP input *1 *2 Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V (input impedance: 1 M min.) 11-segment digital display and individual indicators Indication method Character height: PV: 15.2 mm, SV: 7.1 mm Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, Multi SP *3 or serial communications. Bank switching None Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital Other functions filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting -10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: -10 to 50C with standard mounting Ambient operating temperature (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 25% to 85% Storage temperature -25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing) Altitude 2,000 m max. Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1) *1. There are no optional functions for the E5CC-U. Refer to Model Number Legend and List of Models on page 21. *2. This function is not supported by the E5CC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 20. *3. With the E5CC-B, there can be up to four set points if event inputs are used to select them. 23 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs) Sensor type Platinum resistance thermometer Sensor specification Pt100 Infrared temperature sensor Thermocouple JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B C/W PLII 10 to 70C 60 to 120C 115 to 165C 120 165 140 to 260C 2300 2300 1800 1800 1700 1700 1700 1600 1500 Temperature range (C) 1400 1300 1300 1300 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 850 850 850 800 700 600 600 500.0 500 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 300 200 100.0 100 0.0 -100 -200 100.0 90 100 0 -200 -199.9 0 1 Set value 0.0 199.9 2 3 -20.0 -100 -20.0 6 7 8 -200 4 5 0 0 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 -100 -200 -199.9 -200 9 10 11 12 -200 -199.9 -200 13 14 15 18 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Analog input Input type Input specification Current 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Voltage 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V Usable in the following ranges by scaling: -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9, -19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999 Set value 25 26 27 28 29 * The range applies to the E5CC-U only for those manufactured in May 2014 or later. 0 to 50 mV* Setting range 24 30 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Alarm Types Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 19 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.) Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed. To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1. Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON 2 * 1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this SP deviation range. Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm X X 2 ON ON Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the OFF PV OFF PV (default) SP SP SP by the deviation or more. Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the X X ON ON 3 Lower-limit alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than OFF PV OFF PV SP SP the SP by the deviation or more. Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H Upper- and lower-limit limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON *3 4 OFF PV range *1 lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this SP deviation range. Set value 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Alarm type Upper- and lower-limit with ON OFF standby sequence *1 *5 Upper-limit with standby ON OFF sequence L Lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF X Absolute-value upperlimit ON OFF Absolute-value lower-limit ON OFF Absolute-value upperlimit with standby sequence ON OFF Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 12 13 LBA (alarm 1 type only) PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute-value upper-limit alarm ON OFF SP absolute-value lower-limit alarm ON OFF 15 H X SP SP PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 ON OFF 16 X 0 ON OFF 19 A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6 PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6 X SP X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV ON OFF SP ON OFF X 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upperlimit alarm (8). *6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lowerlimit alarm (9). *6 X 0 SP X 0 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is lower than the alarm value (X). Standard Control X MV 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. ON OFF X 0 MV X MV 0 Standard Control X MV 0 Always ON ON OFF X 0 MV This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X). Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV) ON OFF 18 PV *7 *8 SP Standard Control 17 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X). Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV) ON OFF MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm *9 X - Standard Control MV absolute-value upper-limit alarm *9 A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit alarm (1). *6 *4 PV SP RSP absolute-value upper-limit alarm *10 ON OFF RSP absolute-value lower-limit alarm *10 ON OFF X MV 0 X 0 RSP ON OFF RSP ON OFF X 0 Always ON X 0 RSP X 0 RSP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP (RSP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP (RSP) is lower than the alarm value (X). 25 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U *1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as "L" and "H." *2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Case 2 Case 1 Case 3 (Always ON) H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| H SP L H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| SP L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| L SP H SP H L H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range Case 1 Case 3 (Always OFF) Case 2 H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| SP L H H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L L SP SP H L 26 H<0, L>0 |H| |L| H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2 * Case 1 and 2 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. * Case 3: Always OFF *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby sequence. *7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No.H174) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA). *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm. *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation. *10.This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used. It functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode. Remote SP input is supported only for the E5CC. E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Characteristics E5CC/E5CC-B Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max. Indication accuracy CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. (at the ambient temperature of 23C) E5CC-U Thermocouple: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max. Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max. Simple transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.*2 Remote SP Input Type 0.2% FS 1 digit max. Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Influence of temperature *3 Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Influence of voltage *3 Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max. Influence of EMS. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. (at EN 61326-1) Remote SP input: 1% FS 1 digit max. Input sampling period 50 ms Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Hysteresis Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) for cooling Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100 max.) Influence of signal source resistance Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10 max.) Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions E5CC/E5CC-B: Controller: Approx. 120 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 10 g Weight E5CC-U: Controller: Approx. 100 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 10 g E5CC/E5CC-B: Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Degree of protection E5CC-U: Front panel: IP50, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) E5CC: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher Setup Tool E5CC-B: CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher *7 E5CC-U: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect Setup Tool port to a USB port on the computer. *6 *1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is 1% FS max. *3. Ambient temperature: -10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage *4. K thermocouple at -100C max.: 10C max. *5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter. *6. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time. *7. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type. 27 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1 *8, KOSHA (S Mark) certification (Some models only.) *9, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some models only.) *9, Lloyd's standards *10, Standards EAC Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM EMI: EN 61326-1 *11 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN 61326-1 *11 ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2 EMC Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11 *8. The E5CC-U plug-in model is certified for UL listing only when used together with the OMRON P2CF-11 or P2CF-11-E Socket. The P3GA-11 is not certified for UL listing. *9. Access the following website for information on certified models. http://www.ia.omron.com/support/models/index.html *10.Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 124 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards. *11.Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2) Approved standards 28 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher (Version 4.61 or higher is required for the Applicable software E5CC-U, Version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5CC-B *3.) Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 2.0. DTE speed 38400 bps Computer: USB (type A plug) Connector Digital Temperature Controller: specifications Special serial connector Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.)*2 Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 450 mA max. 4.70.2 VDC Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) 250 mA max. Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ambient operating 0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) temperature Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Storage temperature -20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 120 g Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries. *1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. *2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. *3. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type. Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Applicable OS Communications Specifications Transmission line connection method Communications Synchronization method Protocol Baud rate * Transmission code Data bit length * Stop bit length * RS-485: Multidrop RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Start-stop synchronization CompoWay/F, or Modbus 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps ASCII 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Error detection Block check character (BCC) with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications 0 to 99 ms response wait time Default: 20 ms * The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Communications Functions Programless communications *1 You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The E5@C automatically performs communications with PLCs. No communications programming is required. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series) Applicable PLCs OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series, NJ Series, or NX1P Mitsubishi Electric PLCs MELSEC Q Series, L Series, FX3 Series, or iQ-R Series KEYENCE PLCs KEYENCE KV Series When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as the Component master to the Digital Temperature Communications *1 Controllers that are set as slaves. Slope and offsets can be set for the set point. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (including master) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, the parameters can be copied Copying *2 from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation. *1. A Temperature Controller with version 1.1 or higher is required. A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for the FX Series or the KV Series. *2. Both the programless communications and the component communications support the copying. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings E54-CT1 E54-CT1L E54-CT3 E54-CT3L Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g Weight E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g E54-CT3 Only Accessories Armatures (2) None Plugs (2) Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms Models with detection for single-phase heaters: One input Models with detection for singlephase or three-phase heaters: Two inputs Maximum heater current 50 A AC Input current 5% FS 1 digit max. indication accuracy Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3 SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4 *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). *2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. CT input (for heater current detection) Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Control Output Relays (Reference Values) Life (x 104 operations) USB-Serial Conversion Cable 500 300 100 50 30 10 5 E5CC/E5CC-B 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cos = 1 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switching current (A) 29 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U External Connections E5CC (Screw Terminal Blocks) Control output 1 Relay output 250 VAC, 3A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. E5CC-@@ 3 @ 5 M - @ @ @ Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3 Control output 2 Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA (1) Control outputs 1, 2 RX QX Models with 1 Relay Output 1 2 3 Relay outputs Models with 3 auxiliary outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) QQ CX OUT1 + - Q 1 2 3 (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input Pt TC V I A + 4 4 4 4 B mA - 5 - 5 5 5 B V 6 6 6 + 6 + (6) Options 001 Event Inputs 1 and 2, and CT1 (-) 13 14 EV1 15 EV2 CT1 16 17 18 003 Communications (RS-485), CT1, and CT2 B(+) RS-485 A(-) 13 14 CT1 COM CT2 17 18 (2) Auxiliary Outputs Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3 OUT1 +C - Q + OUT2 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 1 13 7 2 3 14 8 9 4 5 16 17 10 11 6 18 12 15 Auxiliary output 3 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 (3) Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC 11 11 12 12 (no polarity) 004 Communications (RS-485), and Event Inputs 3 and 4 B(+) RS-485 A(-) 15 16 The E5CC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current Output and Voltage (for Driving SSR) OUT1 +Q - Q + OUT2 OUT1 1 + - C 2 3 (6) CQ Models with 2 Models with Voltage Outputs 1 Linear Current Output (for Driving SSR) Models with 1 Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) OUT1 1 R 2 3 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type 13 14 15 16 (-) EV3 EV4 17 18 005 Event Inputs 1 to 4 (-) EV1 EV2 (-) EV3 EV4 13 14 15 007 Event Inputs 1 and 2, and Remote SP Input 13 (-) 14 006 Event Inputs 1 and 2, and Transfer Output (-) EV1 EV2 13 14 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 EV1 + + V I - EV2 + 15 16 V + mA 17 18 - Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3 crimped terminals. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). 30 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U E5CC-B (Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) E5CC-@@ 2 @ B M - @ @ @ (1) Control output 1 Relay output 250 VAC, 3A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type (6) The E5CC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Relay outputs outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) (1) Control output 1 RX QX OUT1 R 1 2 CX Models with 1 Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) Models with 1 Relay Output + OUT1 - Q 1 2 Models with 1 Linear Current Output 1 2 + OUT1 - C (2) Auxiliary Outputs (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input TC 6 - 7 + 8 Pt A 6 B 7 B 8 V 6 - 7 V 8 + I + 6 mA 7 8 1 2 17 18 3 4 5 6 7 19 20 21 22 23 10 11 12 13 14 15 8 24 16 9 Auxiliary output 2 10 Auxiliary output 1 12 (3) Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC 13 002 Communications (RS-485), CT1 (-) 17 (-) EV1 EV2 18 B(+) * RS-485 19 A(-) 20 17 18 19 20 21 004 Communications (RS-485), and Event Inputs 3 and 4 B(+) * * A(-) (-) (-) 22 23 23 24 24 19 20 CT1 22 17 18 RS-485 21 CT1 * 11 (6) Options 001 Event Inputs 1 and 2, and CT1 9 EV3 EV4 21 22 006 Event Inputs 1 and 2, and Transfer Output (-) * * (-) EV1 EV2 * 17 14 15 16 * 13 14 15 16 * * (no polarity) * 18 * 19 20 21 + 22 23 23 24 24 + V I Transfer Output - Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) on page 133 for wire specifications and wiring methods. 5. Common terminals are indicated with asterisks (*). You can use the input power supply and communications common terminals for crossover wiring. Do not exceed the maximum number of Temperature Controllers given below if you use crossover wiring for the input power supply. 100 to 240 VAC Controllers: 16 max. 24 VAC/VDC Controllers: 8 max. Wiring Example: 13 14 15 16 To another E5@C 6. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). 31 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U E5CC-U (Plug-in Models) E5CC-UM-000 The E5CC-U is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Control output 1 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Control output 1 Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2: Control output (cooling I Pt + V mA - A TC - - B + + B V Input power supply * 100 to 240 VAC * 24 VAC/DC (no polarity) Sensor (temperature/analog) input Control output 1 Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. Relay output (three terminals used) SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Control output 1: - Output 1 Q + RW CX QX Models with 1 Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) Models with 1 Relay Output Models with 1 Linear Current Output - Output 1 C Output 1 R + Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3.5 crimped terminals. Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams E5CC E5CC-U Models with 3 Auxiliary Outputs Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs Power supply Sensor input, CT inputs, and remote SP input Sensor input Communications and event inputs Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output Voltage output (for driving SSR), linear current output, and transfer output Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3 : Functional isolation Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 are not insulated. E5CC-B Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input and CT input Communications and event inputs Voltage output (for driving SSR), linear current output and transfer output Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation 32 Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation : Reinforced insulation Power supply Power supply E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Nomenclature E5CC E5CC-B E5CC-U Front panel Temperature unit Top View of E5CC Top View of E5CC-B Top View of E5CC-U No. 1 display Operation indicators PV or specified parameter No. 2 display SP or specified parameter value Use the U D Keys to set the parameter. Top-panel Setup Tool port Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level. Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level. Use the M Key to change to another parameter. Dimensions (Unit: mm) Controllers E5CC 73.1 60 4 48 x 48 1 44.8 x 44.8 44.8 x 44.8 48.8 58 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P8 (also available for ordering separately)) Mounting Adapter Terminal Cover (Accessory, Y92F-49 (E53-COV17) (also available for (Order separately) ordering separately)) E5CC-B (71.4) 4 67.4 (1) 48 x 48 44.8 x 44.8 44.8 x 44.8 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P8 (also available for ordering separately)) 58 Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-49 (also available for ordering separately)) The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller. It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection. Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure. Note: Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller. Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted (48 x number of units - 2.5)+1.0 0 45+0.6 0 60 min. 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. * Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together. 33 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U E5CC-U 76.8 58.6 4 48 x 48 14.2 44.8 x 44.8 58 Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-49 (also available for ordering separately)) The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller. It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection. Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure. Note: Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller. Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted (48 x number of units - 2.5)+1.0 0 45+0.6 0 60 min. 45+0.6 0 * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. * Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together. 45+0.6 0 Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2 (2110) 250 263 1510 LED (RD) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED (PWR) LED (SD) Terminal Covers Terminal Covers 48 E53-COV17 E53-COV23 (Three Covers provided.) 2 3.8 48.8 10 Terminal Cover (E53-COV23) 22 44.8 9.1 Terminal Cover (for the P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket) Y92A-48G Twelve, 6.4-dia. 34 Y92A-48G UP 47.7x47.7 48x48 P C 16.5 47.4 34 24.6 27.6 Note: You can attach the P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket for finger protection. E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Waterproof Packing The Waterproof Packing is provided only with the E5CC/E5CC-B. It is not included with the E5CC-U. Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection. (Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider three years as a rough standard.) The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof Packing is attached. Y92S-P8 (for DIN 48 x 48) Current Transformers E54-CT1 21 Filler (epoxy) 15 5.8 dia. 7.5 Case 25 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L 2.8 Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 182 2.5 40 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 10.5 10 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 100V Frequency: 50 Hz 1k 10 Distortion factor 10% 1 3% 1% 100mV 100 10 RL=10 1 E54-CT1L 21 8 100V 15 10 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) Cable (AWG18) 1155 (12) Shrinkable tube Case (PBT) 5.8 dia. 25 Mark (yellow) Filler (epoxy) 2.5 10.5 40 5 10 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 35 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 30 Filler (epoxy) 12 dia. 9 Case (PBT) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 80.8 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 40 x 40 15 40 8 Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3 Accessories * Armature 30 Connection Example Approx. 3 dia. Frequency: 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 1k 500 10 1 100mV 100 50 RL=10 1 Lead 100V 10 1 18 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) * Plug Approx. 6 dia. (22) E54-CT3L 8 30 1005 Cable (AWG18) Case (PBT) 12.0 dia. Filler (epoxy) 40 40 15 Two, M3 (depth: 4) 8 30 36 100V 10 Armature Plug Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Adapter Y92F-45 Note: 1. Use this Adapter when the Front Panel has already been prepared for the E5B@. 2. Only black is available. 3. You cannot use the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable if you use the Y92F-45 Adapter. To use the USB-Serial Conversion Cable to make the settings, do so before you mount the Temperature Controller in the panel. 4. You cannot use it together with the Y92F-49 Adapter that is enclosed with the Controller. Fixture (Accessory) 76 4.7 69.6 to 77.6 72 x 72 67 x 67 87 Mounted to E5CC Panel (1 to 8 mm) Mounting Adapter Y92F-30 (Accessory) 72 x 72 48 x 48 2.2 4.7 62.8 To back of the E5CC DIN Track Mounting Adapter Y92F-52 Note: This Adapter cannot be used together with the Terminal Cover. Remove the Terminal Cover to use the Adapter. 61 3.5 This Adapter is used to mount the E5CC to a DIN Track. If you use the Adapter, there is no need for a plate to mount in the panel or to drill mounting holes in the panel. 38 50 Mounted to E5CC 48 80.5 37 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U Watertight Cover Mounting Adapter Y92A-48N Y92F-49 21.9 14 The Mounting Adapter is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it becomes lost or damaged. (2) 87.7 69 79.2 12 67.6 Protective Cover Y92A-48D Protective Cover Y92A-48H Note: This Protective Cover cannot be used if the Waterproof Packing is installed. This Protective Cover is hard type. Please use it for the mis-operation prevention etc. This Protective Cover is soft type. It is able to operate the controller with using this cover. E5CC-U Wiring Socket Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11 Eleven, M3.5 x 7.5 sems screws 3 Terminal Layout/Internal Connections (Top View) 4.5 7.8 8 7 6 5 Mounting Holes 4 Two, 4.5 dia. mounting holes 35.4 70 max. Two, 4.5-dia. holes 4 50 max. 400.2 9 3 10 11 1 2 Note: Can also be mounted to a DIN track 31.2 max. Note: 1. A model with finger protection (P2CF-11-E) is also available. 2. You cannot use the P2CF-11 or P2CF-11-E together with the Y92F-45. Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11 27dia. 4 7 3 Eleven, M3.5 sems screws Terminal Layout/Internal Connections (Bottom View) 5 6 7 8 4 45 25.6 3 9 2 1 11 10 45 4.5 16.3 6.2 6 8.7 Note: 1. Using any other sockets will adversely affect accuracy. Use only the specified sockets. 2. A Protective Cover for finger protection (Y92A-48G) is also available. 3. You cannot use the P3GA-11 together with the Y92F-45. 38 MEMO 39 Digital Temperature Controller E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC (48 x 96 mm/96 x 96 mm) Large White PV Display That's Easier to Read. Easy to Use, from Model Selection to Setup and Operation. Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks Added to 48 x 96-mm Lineup. * * CSA conformance evaluation by UL. * A white LCD PV display with a height of approx. 18 mm for the E5EC/E5EC-B and 25 mm for the E5AC improves visibility. * High-speed sampling at 50 ms. * With 48 x 96-mm Controllers, you can select between screw terminal blocks or Push-In Plus terminal blocks to save wiring work. * Short body with depth of only 60 mm. (Screw Terminal Blocks) 48 x 96 mm 48 x 96 mm 96 x 96 mm * Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Screw Terminal Push-In Plus Screw Terminal Blocks Blocks Terminal E5AC Use component communications to link Temperature Controllers E5EC Blocks E5EC-B to each other. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable safety standards. * Tool ports are provided both on the top panel and the front panel. Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122. connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). Main I/O Functions Sensor Input Universal input * Thermocouple * Pt * Analog current/voltage E5EC/E5EC-B E5AC Three-level Display PV, SV, and MV displayed at the same time. 4-digit displays Indication Accuracy * Thermocouple input: 0.3% of PV * Pt input: 0.2% of PV * Analog input: 0.2% of FS Control Output 1 * Relay output * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Linear current output Sampling Period * 50 ms Event Inputs * None *2 *4 *6 Remote SP Input * None *1 Serial Communications * None * RS-485 * PF (shift) Key * Setup Tool port on front panel * Temperature status display * Simple programming * Independent heating and cooling PID control * Changed parameter display * Display brightness setting Control Output 2 * Voltage output * None (for driving SSR) * Relay output * Linear current output Auxiliary Outputs *4 *2 *4 Transfer Output * None *1 This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175) 40 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Model Number Legend and Standard Models Model Number Legend Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5EC-@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5EC-RX4A5M-000) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F E5AC-@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5AC-RX4A5M-000) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F A Model Control outputs 1 and 2 B No. of auxiliary outputs C D E F Power Terminal Input Options supply type type voltage Meaning 48 x 96 mm 96 x 96 mm Control output 1 Relay output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Voltage output (for driving SSR) Relay output E5EC E5AC RX QX *2 CX QQ QR RR *2 CQ PR *3 4 A D 5 M For RX, For CX or QX, QQ, For PR QR, RR, or CC CQ Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Option Selectable selection conditions *1 Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable None None Voltage output (for driving SSR) Relay output Relay output Linear current Linear current output output Voltage output Linear current output (for driving SSR) PositionPosition-proportional relay output proportional relay output 4 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 with same common) 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Screw terminal blocks (with cover) Universal input *2 CC Control outputs 1 and 2 Control output 2 None 000 004 005 009 010 011 013 014 HB alarm Event Remote Transfer and Communications inputs SP Input output HS alarm ------------RS-485 2 --------4 ----2 (for 3-phase RS-485 2 ----heaters) 1 --4 ----1 --6 Provided. Provided. ----6 Provided. Provided. --RS-485 4 Provided. Provided. *1. The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output. *2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output. *3. A model with four auxiliary outputs must be selected. Note: Draw-out-type models of the E5EC and E5AC are available. Ask your OMRON representative for details. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling. (It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.) B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 41 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Model Number Legend Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks E5EC-@@ @ @ B M -@@@ (Example: E5EC-RX4ABM-000) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F Model A Control outputs 1 and 2 B No. of auxiliary outputs C Power supply voltage D E Terminal Input type type F Options Meaning 48 x 96 mm Control output 1 Control output 2 *1 RX Relay output None Voltage output *2 QX None (for driving SSR) *2 CX Linear current output *3 None 2 2 independent points 4 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and auxiliary 4 outputs 3 and 4 with same common) A 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC/DC B Push-in plus terminal blocks M Universal input HB alarm Event Remote Transfer and Communications inputs SP Input output HS alarm 000 ----------*1 004 --RS-485 2 ----*2 008 1 RS-485 2 ----*2 010 1 --4 ----*2 011 1 --6 Provided. Provided. *1 014 --RS-485 4 Provided. Provided. *1. Option 004 and 014 cannot be selected if RX or QX is selected for the control output. *2. Option 008, 010 and 011 cannot be selected if CX is selected for the control output. *3. The control output cannot be used as a simple transfer output. E5EC Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 42 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Optional Products (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2 Communications Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2-E Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool port. Terminal Covers (for E5EC/E5AC) Model E53-COV24 (3pcs) Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV24 are provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproof Packing Applicable Controller Model E5EC/E5EC-B Y92S-P9 E5AC Y92S-P10 Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Current Transformers (CTs) Hole diameter Model 5.8 mm E54-CT1 5.8 mm E54-CT1L * 12.0 mm E54-CT3 12.0 mm E54-CT3L * * Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use these CTs. CX-Thermo Support Software Model EST2-2C-MV4 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher is required for the E5EC/ E5AC. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5EC-B. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com). Waterproof Cover Applicable Controller E5EC/E5EC-B E5AC Model Y92A-49N Y92A-96N Front Port Cover Model Y92S-P7 Note: This Front Port Cover is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-51 (2pcs) Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. 43 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Specifications Ratings A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Models with option selection of 000: 6.6 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or E5EC/ 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC E5EC-B All other models: 8.3 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.5 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.2 W max. at 24 VDC Power consumption Models with option selection of 000: 7.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.2 VA max. at 24 VAC or E5AC 2.4 W max. at 24 VDC All other models: 9.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.6 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.4 W max. at 24 VDC Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Sensor input Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. Input impedance (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.) Control method ON/OFF or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, Relay output minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) Control Voltage output Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit output (for driving SSR) (The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.) Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000 E5EC/E5AC: 4 Number of outputs E5EC-B: 2 or 4 (depends on model) Auxiliary SPST-NO. relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 2 outputs: 3 A (resistive load), output Output specifications Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value) Number of inputs 2, 4 or 6 (depends on model) Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. Event input External contact input Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. specifications Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output) Transfer Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 500 max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000 output Output specifications Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., Resolution: Approx. 10,000 Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 150 max.) Remote SP input Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V (input impedance: 1 M min.) Potentiometer input * 100 to 10 k Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys 11-segment digital display and individual indicators Character height: E5EC/E5EC-B: PV: 18.0 mm, SV: 11.0 mm, MV: 7.8 mm Indication method E5AC: PV: 25.0 mm, SV: 15.0 mm, MV: 9.5 mm Three displays Contents: PV/SV/MV, PV/SV/Multi-SP, or PV/SV/Remaining soak time, etc Numbers of digits: 4 digits each for PM, SV, and MV displays Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, Multi SP or serial communications. Bank switching None Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital Other functions filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting -10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: -10 to 50C with standard mounting Ambient operating temperature (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85% Storage temperature -25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing) Altitude 2,000 m max. Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1) * This function is not supported by the E5EC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 42. Power supply voltage 44 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs) Sensor type Platinum resistance thermometer Sensor specification Pt100 Infrared temperature sensor Thermocouple JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B C/W PLII 10 to 70C 60 to 120C 115 to 165C 120 165 140 to 260C 2300 2300 1800 1800 1700 1700 1700 1600 Temperature range (C) 1500 1400 1300 1300 1300 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 850 850 850 800 700 600 600 500.0 500 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 300 200 100.0 100 90 100 0.0 -100 -200 100.0 -200 -199.9 0 1 Set value 0.0 -199.9 2 3 -20.0 -100 -20.0 6 7 8 -200 4 5 0 0 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 -100 -200 -199.9 -200 9 10 11 12 -200 -199.9 -200 13 14 15 18 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Analog input Input type Input specification Setting range Set value Current 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Voltage 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V Usable in the following ranges by scaling: -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9, -19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999 25 26 27 28 0 to 10 V 29 45 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Alarm Types Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 19 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.) Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed. To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1. Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON 2 * 1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this SP deviation range. Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm X X 2 ON ON Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the OFF PV OFF PV (default) SP SP SP by the deviation or more. Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the X X ON ON 3 Lower-limit alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than OFF PV OFF PV SP SP the SP by the deviation or more. Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H Upper- and lower-limit limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON 3 * 4 OFF PV range *1 lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this SP deviation range. Set value Alarm type Upper- and lower-limit with ON OFF standby sequence *1 *5 Upper-limit with standby ON OFF sequence L 7 Lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF X 8 Absolute-value upperlimit ON OFF 9 Absolute-value lower-limit ON OFF 10 Absolute-value upperlimit with standby sequence ON OFF 11 Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 12 13 LBA (alarm 1 type only) PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute-value upper-limit alarm ON OFF 15 SP absolute-value lower-limit alarm ON OFF 5 6 H X SP SP PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 ON OFF 16 X 0 ON OFF A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6 PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6 X SP X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV ON OFF SP ON OFF X 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upperlimit alarm (8). *6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lowerlimit alarm (9). *6 X 0 SP X 0 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is lower than the alarm value (X). Standard Control X MV 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. ON OFF X 0 MV X MV 0 Standard Control X MV 0 Always ON ON OFF X 0 MV This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X). Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV) ON OFF 46 PV *7 *8 SP Standard Control 17 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X). Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV) ON OFF MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm *9 X - Standard Control MV absolute-value upper-limit alarm *9 A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit alarm (1). *6 *4 PV SP 18 RSP absolute-value upper-limit alarm *10 ON OFF 19 RSP absolute-value lower-limit alarm *10 ON OFF X MV 0 X 0 RSP ON OFF RSP ON OFF X 0 Always ON X 0 RSP X 0 RSP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP (RSP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP (RSP) is lower than the alarm value (X). E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC *1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as "L" and "H." *2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Case 2 Case 1 Case 3 (Always ON) H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| H SP L H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| L SP SP H L H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range Case 1 L Case 3 (Always OFF) Case 2 H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| SP L H H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L L SP SP H L H<0, L<0 H<0, L>0 |H| |L| H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2 * Case 1 and 2 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. * Case 3: Always OFF *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby sequence. *7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA). This setting cannot be used with a position-proportional model. *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm. *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation. *10.This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used. It functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode. 47 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Characteristics Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. Potentiometer input: 5% FS 1 digit max. Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max. Remote SP Input Type 0.2% FS 1 digit max. Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Influence of temperature *2 Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *3 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Influence of voltage *2 Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max. Influence of EMS. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. (at EN 61326-1) Remote SP input: 1% FS 1 digit max. Input sampling period 50ms Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C orF) Hysteresis Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Standard, heating/cooling, or Position-proportional (Close): 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) Integral time (I) Position-proportional (Floating): 1 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.1 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s)*4 Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) for cooling Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Influence of signal source Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100 max.) resistance Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10 max.) Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions E5EC/E5EC-B: Controller: Approx. 210 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g x 2 Weight E5AC: Controller: Approx. 250 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g x 2 Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) E5EC/E5AC: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher Setup Tool E5EC-B: CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher *9 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB port on the computer.*5 Setup Tool port E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable are used together to connect to a USB port on the computer.*5 cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some Approved standards models only.) *6, Lloyd's standards *7, EAC Standards Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM EMI EN 61326-1 *8 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN 61326-1 *8 ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2 EMC Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11 Indication accuracy (at the ambient temperature of 23C) *1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *2. Ambient temperature: -10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage *3. K thermocouple at -100C max.: 10C max. *4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter. *5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time. *6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models. *7. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 124 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards. *8. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2) *9. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type. 48 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 E5EC/E5AC:CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher Applicable software E5EC-B:CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher *3 Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 2.0. DTE speed 38,400 bps Computer: USB (type A plug) Connector Digital Temperature Controller: specifications Special serial connector Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.) *2 Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 450 mA max. 4.70.2 VDC Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) 250 mA max. Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ambient operating 0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) temperature Ambient operating 10% to 80% humidity Storage temperature -20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 120 g Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries. *1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. *2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. *3. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type. Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Applicable OS Communications Specifications Transmission line connection method Communications Synchronization method Protocol Baud rate * Transmission code Data bit length * Stop bit length * RS-485: Multidrop RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Start-stop synchronization CompoWay/F, or Modbus 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps ASCII 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Error detection Block check character (BCC) with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications 0 to 99 ms response wait time Default: 20 ms * The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Communications Functions Programless communications *1 You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The E5@C automatically performs communications with PLCs. No communications programming is required. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series) Applicable PLCs OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series, NJ Series, or NX1P Mitsubishi Electric PLCs MELSEC Q Series, L Series, FX3 Series, or iQ-R Series KEYENCE PLCs KEYENCE KV Series When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as the Component master to the Digital Temperature Communications *1 Controllers that are set as slaves. Slope and offsets can be set for the set point. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (including master) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, the parameters can be copied Copying *2 from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation. *1. A Temperature Controller with version 1.1 or higher is required. A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for the FX Series or the KV Series. *2. Both the programless communications and the component communications support the copying. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings E54-CT1 E54-CT1L E54-CT3 E54-CT3L Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g Weight E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g E54-CT3 Only Accessories Armatures (2) None Plugs (2) Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms CT input (for heater current detection) Models with detection for singlephase heaters: One input Models with detection for singlephase or three-phase heaters: Two inputs Maximum heater 50 A AC current Input current 5% FS 1 digit max. indication accuracy Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3 SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4 *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). *2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Control Output Relays (Reference Values) Life (x 104 operations) USB-Serial Conversion Cable 500 300 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cos = 1 100 50 30 10 5 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switching current (A) 49 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC External Connections E5EC/E5AC (Screw Terminal Blocks) E5EC-@@ 4 @ 5 M - @ @ @ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type Control output 1 Control output 2 Relay output 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 40 mA When There Is a Control Output 2: 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. Relay output 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. (1) Control output RX Models with 1 Relay Output QX Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4 (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type QQ OUT1 + C - 3 4 5 6 17 EV1 18 EV2 19 17 EV1 18 EV2 19 20 21 20 21 RR +Q OUT2 PR Models with 2 Relay Outputs OUT1 3 4 5 6 R R OUT2 3 4 5 6 R OUT2 CC Models with 2 Models with 2 Position-proportional Linear Current Relay Output Outputs Open 3 4 5 6 R R Close OUT1 3 4 5 6 + C + C - OUT2 100 to 240 VAC 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 + Q OUT2 (2) Auxiliary Outputs Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 Auxiliary output 4 Auxiliary output 3 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 21 (-) 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 + + Remote V 35 mA SP input 36 - 22 - 23 + 24 28 (-) 19 20 21 EV5 EV6 + Transfer V + output I - Pt A 22 B 23 B 24 I + 22 mA 23 24 29 30 31 32 33 34 + + V Remote 35 SP input mA 36 (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input TC 17 EV1 18 EV2 19 CT1 20 EV5 EV6 + Transfer V + I output - 21 (-) Potentiometer Input O W C 13 013 6 event Inputs, transfer output, and remote SP input Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current Output and Voltage (for Driving SSR) OUT1 + C - 21 14 EV3 15 EV4 16 (-) 24 VAC/DC 1 CQ 3 4 5 6 CT2 (-) (3) Input Power Supply (no polarity) OUT1 +Q - 009 010 Communications, 2 event 4 event inputs and 1 CT input inputs, and 2 CT inputs B(+) 13 (-) 13 RS-485 14 14 EV3 A(-) 15 15 EV4 (-) 16 (-) 16 17 17 EV1 EV1 18 18 EV2 EV2 19 19 CT1 CT1 20 COM 20 011 6 event Inputs, 1 CT input, transfer output, and remote SP input QR OUT1 +Q - The E5EC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. 005 004 4 event inputs Communications and 2 event inputs B(+) 13 13 (-) RS-485 14 14 EV3 A(-) 15 15 EV4 (-) 16 16 (-) Models with Voltage Output (for Models with 2 Voltage Outputs (for Driving SSR) Driving SSR) and Relay Output 3 4 5 6 (6) (6) Options Relay output Models with 4 auxiliary outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) CX OUT1 +Q - 3 4 5 6 (1) Models with 1 Linear Current Output Models with 1 Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) OUT1 R 3 4 5 6 E5AC-@@ 4 @ 5 M - @ @ @ (6) 13 14 EV3 15 EV4 (-) 16 17 EV1 18 EV2 19 20 21 014 Communications, 4 event Inputs, transfer output, and remote SP input B(+) 13 RS-485 14 A(-) 15 (-) 28 (-) 16 EV5 EV6 + Transfer V + I output - 29 30 31 32 33 + 34 Remote V + 35 mA SP input 36 17 EV1 18 EV2 19 20 21 Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. V V + 22 23 24 Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3 crimped terminals. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). 50 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC E5EC-B (Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) E5EC-@@ @ @ B M - @ @ @ (1) Models with 1 Relay Output 004 Communications, 2 event inputs B(+) 17 18 The E5EC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. QX 20 (-) 6 1 2 OUT1 +Q - 5 6 21 (-) 3 4 22 24 VAC/DC 1 * 2 3 * 4 CX 6 * (2) Auxiliary Outputs Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4 9 9 Auxiliary output 4 Auxiliary output 2 15 23 45 29 14 46 30 14 15 47 31 16 48 32 * 15 Auxiliary output 1 22 39 13 * 12 14 38 13 11 Auxiliary output 2 21 10 11 12 11 13 37 24 25 26 27 28 10 Auxiliary output 3 17 18 19 20 40 41 42 43 44 10 12 33 34 35 36 * (-) 17 18 EV4 (-) 21 (-) 22 EV1 EV2 30 + 32 32 + 30 mA 31 32 + 23 24 26 011 6 event Inputs, 1 CT input, transfer output, and remote SP input (-) * (-) EV5 EV6 (-) 37 * 38 (-) 39 EV3 40 EV4 (-) 41 * + 42 23 43 24 44 + V EV1 I Transfer output 45 + V (-) 46 EV2 17 18 * 19 20 21 22 * 23 24 25 CT1 26 + 47 mA 48 - 014 Communications, 4 event inputs, transfer output, and remote SP input B(+) (-) 37 (-) 38 17 * RS-485 39 42 30 43 44 32 + V Remote SP input - 18 A(-) 19 20 40 V - 31 V * 22 25 CT1 (-) 41 I 21 Remote SP input (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input - 31 EV2 26 EV6 A 30 B 31 B EV1 25 CT1 16 Pt (-) 20 EV5 TC (-) * 19 EV3 * 20 010 4 event inputs and 1 CT input Auxiliary output 1 16 19 A(-) 26 (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * * 18 RS-485 25 (no polarity) OUT1 +C - 17 * 24 EV2 Models with 1 linear current Output 5 008 Communications, 2 event inputs, and 1 CT input B(+) 23 EV1 100 to 240 VAC Models with 1 Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) 19 A(-) (3) Input Power Supply OUT1 R 5 (6) Options (6) RS-485 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4 Relay output Model with 2 auxiliary outputs: 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Models with 4 auxiliary outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) Control output 1 Relay output 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 40 mA (1) Control output RX (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type + + I V Transfer output - (-) EV1 EV2 21 22 * * * 23 24 45 25 46 26 + 47 mA 48 Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) on page 133 for wire specifications and wiring methods. 5. Common terminals are indicated with asterisks (*). You can use the input power supply and communications common terminals for crossover wiring. Do not exceed the maximum number of Temperature Controllers given below if you use crossover wiring for the input power supply. 100 to 240 VAC Controllers: 16 max. 24 VAC/VDC Controllers: 8 max. Wiring Example: 1 2 3 4 To another E5@C 6. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). 51 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input, CT inputs, and remote SP input Sensor input, CT inputs, potentiometer input, and remote SP input Communications and event inputs Communications and event inputs Voltage output (for driving SSR) and transfer output Power Supply Power Supply Voltage output (for driving SSR), linear current output, and transfer output Relay output Relay output Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary outputs 3, 4 : Reinforced insulation : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation : Functional isolation Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 are not insulated. Nomenclature E5EC/E5EC-B Front panel No. 1 display PV or specified parameter Temperature unit Top View of E5EC Top View of E5EC-B No. 2 display Operation indicators SP or specified parameter value No. 3 display Front-panel Setup Tool port Manipulated value or other value Use the U D Keys to set the parameter. Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level. Use the M Key to change to another parameter. Top-panel Setup Tool port Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level. E5AC Front Panel Temperature unit Operation indicators Top View of E5AC No. 1 display PV or specified parameter No. 2 display SP or specified parameter value Front-panel Setup Tool port No. 3 display Manipulated value or other value Press the U or D Key to set the parameter. Press the S Key to change the digit (default setting). Press the O Key once to go to the Adjustment Level. Press the O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to the Initial Setting Level. 52 Press the M Key to change to another parameter. Top-panel Setup Tool port E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Dimensions (Unit: mm) Controllers E5EC (64) 60 4 1 48 44 96 91 110 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P9 Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-51 (also available for ordering separately)) (also available for ordering separately)) E5EC-B 4 (1) 48 (71.4) 67.4 44 110 96 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P9 (also available for ordering separately)) 91 Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-51 (also available for ordering separately)) * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Mounted Separately Group Mounted * (48 x number of units - 2.5)+1.0 0 45+0.6 0 92+0.8 0 * E5EC: Selections for Control Outputs 1 and 2: QQ, QR, RR, CC, PR, or CQ If you also specify 011, 013, or 014 for the option selection and use group mounting, the ambient temperature must be 45C or less. Maintain the following spacing when more than one Digital Controller is installed at an ambient temperature of 55C. 60 min. 45-0.6 0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. 120 min. 92+0.8 0 92-0.8 0 120 min. * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. 53 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC E5AC (64) 60 4 1 96 x 96 91 x 91 110 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P10 (also available for ordering separately)) 91 Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-51 (also available for ordering separately)) * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Group Mounted Mounted Separately (96 x number of units - 3.5)+1.0 0 92+0.8 0 92+0.8 0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. 120 min. 92+0.8 0 54 * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2 (2110) 250 263 1510 LED (RD) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED (PWR) LED (SD) Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable (2110) (1510) 250 Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. 263 E58-CIFQ2 (Order Separately) Terminal Covers Waterproof Packing E53-COV24 (Three Covers provided.) Y92S-P9 (for DIN 48 x 96) 2 1510 Conversion Cable The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used is IP66. Also, keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port of the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC securely closed. To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. Y92S-P10 (for DIN 96 x 96) The replacement period will vary with the operating environment. Check the required period in the actual application. Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline. 3.8 10 91 Setup Tool Port Cover for top panel Mounting Adapter Y92S-P7 Y92F-51 (Two Adapters provided.) Order this Port Cover separately if the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port is lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing must be periodically replaced because it may deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. One pair is provided with the Controller. Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it becomes lost or damaged. 55 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC Watertight Cover Watertight Cover Y92A-49N (48 x 96) Y92A-96N (96 x 96) 21.9 21.9 (2) (2) 131.7 131.7 67.6 115.6 28.9 28.9 Current Transformers E54-CT1 21 Filler (epoxy) 15 5.8 dia. 7.5 Case 25 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L 2.8 Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 182 2.5 40 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 10.5 10 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 100V Frequency: 50 Hz 1k 10 Distortion factor 10% 1 3% 1% 100mV 100 10 RL=10 1 E54-CT1L 21 8 100V 15 10 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) Cable (AWG18) 1155 (12) Shrinkable tube Case (PBT) 5.8 dia. 25 Mark (yellow) Filler (epoxy) 2.5 10.5 40 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 56 10 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 30 Filler (epoxy) 12 dia. 9 Case (PBT) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 80.8 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 40 x 40 15 40 8 Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3 Accessories * Armature 30 Connection Example Approx. 3 dia. 100V Frequency: 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 1k 500 10 1 100mV 100 50 10 RL=10 Armature Plug Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L 1 Lead 100V 10 1 18 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) * Plug Approx. 6 dia. (22) E54-CT3L 8 30 1005 Cable (AWG18) Case (PBT) 12.0 dia. Filler (epoxy) 40 40 15 Two, M3 (depth: 4) 8 30 57 Digital Temperature Controller E5DC/E5DC-B (22.5 mm Wide, and DIN Track-mounting Type) The E5DC Mounts to DIN Track and Is Ideal for Connections to HMIs and PLCs. It provides the Same Easy Operation and Advanced Performance as the Rest of the E5@C Series. Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks Added to Lineup. * * CSA conformance evaluation by UL. * A slim body at 85 x 22.5 mm (D x W) that fits into narrow control panels and mounts to DIN Track. * Removable terminal block for easy replacement to simplify maintenance. * Select from models with screw terminal blocks and models with 22.5 mm Wide, and 22.5 mm Wide, and Push-In Plus terminal blocks for reduced wiring work. DIN Track-mounting Type DIN Track-mounting Type * No need for power supply and communication line wiring when Models with Screw Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks Terminal Blocks using connectors with Push-In Plus terminal blocks. E5DC E5DC-B (Maximum connectable units: 16) * High-speed sampling at 50 ms for applications with high-speed Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable safety standards. temperature increases. * Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122. * Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). * Models are available with up to 2 auxiliary outputs and 1 event input to complete basic functions. * A white PV display (height: 8.5 mm) is easy to read when setting up, checking alarms, and making settings in a control panel. Main I/O Functions Sensor Input Universal input * Thermocouple * Pt * Analog current/voltage E5DC/E5DC-B Dual displays: PV/SV Control Output 1 * Relay output * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Linear current output Indication Accuracy * Thermocouple input: 0.3% of PV * Pt input: 0.2% of PV * Analog input: 0.2% of FS Sampling Period * 50 ms Event Inputs * None * None *1 Serial Communications * None * RS-485 4-digit displays * PF (shift) Key * Temperature status display * Simple programming * Independent heating and cooling PID control * Changed parameter display * Display brightness setting Auxiliary Outputs * None *2 This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175) 58 E5DC/E5DC-B Model Number Legend and Standard Models Model Number Legend Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5DC-@@ @ @ @ M -@@@ (Example: E5DC-RX0ASM-015) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F A B Control No. of Model outputs 1 auxiliary and 2 outputs E5DC C Power supply voltage D E F Terminal type Input type Options Meaning 22.5 mm wide and mounts to DIN Track Control output 1 Control output 2 RX Relay output None Voltage output QX None (for driving SSR) *1 CX Linear current output *1 None 0 None 2 2 (one common) A 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC/DC S Screw terminal blocks (Main Unit and Terminal Unit together) U Main Unit only (no Terminal Unit) M Universal input HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Event input *2 000 ------*3 002 1 RS-485 --*4 015 --RS-485 --*5 016 ----1 *3 017 1 --1 *1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later. *2. Option 000 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected. *3. Options 002 and 017 can be selected only if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected. *4. Option 015 cannot be selected if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected. *5. Options 016 can be selected only if the control output is a linear current output and two auxiliary outputs are selected. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. List of Models Control output No. of auxiliary outputs Options HB alarm and HS alarm No. of event inputs --- Communications RS-485 ----- --- Relay output 2 Detection for singlephase heater RS-485 1 --- --RS-485 --Voltage output (for driving SSR) --2 Detection for singlephase heater RS-485 1 --RS-485 --Linear current output --- --- --- --2 RS-485 1 --- Model Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC E5DC-RX0ASM-015 E5DC-RX0AUM-015 E5DC-RX2ASM-000 E5DC-RX2AUM-000 E5DC-RX2ASM-002 E5DC-RX2AUM-002 E5DC-RX2ASM-017 E5DC-RX2AUM-017 E5DC-QX0ASM-015 E5DC-QX0AUM-015 E5DC-QX2ASM-000 E5DC-QX2AUM-000 E5DC-QX2ASM-002 E5DC-QX2AUM-002 E5DC-QX2ASM-017 E5DC-QX2AUM-017 E5DC-CX0ASM-015 E5DC-CX0AUM-015 E5DC-CX2ASM-000 E5DC-CX2AUM-000 E5DC-CX2ASM-015 E5DC-CX2AUM-015 E5DC-CX2ASM-016 E5DC-CX2AUM-016 Model Power supply voltage 24 VAC/DC E5DC-RX0DSM-015 E5DC-RX0DUM-015 E5DC-RX2DSM-000 E5DC-RX2DUM-000 E5DC-RX2DSM-002 E5DC-RX2DUM-002 E5DC-RX2DSM-017 E5DC-RX2DUM-017 E5DC-QX0DSM-015 E5DC-QX0DUM-015 E5DC-QX2DSM-000 E5DC-QX2DUM-000 E5DC-QX2DSM-002 E5DC-QX2DUM-002 E5DC-QX2DSM-017 E5DC-QX2DUM-017 E5DC-CX0DSM-015 E5DC-CX0DUM-015 E5DC-CX2DSM-000 E5DC-CX2DUM-000 E5DC-CX2DSM-015 E5DC-CX2DUM-015 E5DC-CX2DSM-016 E5DC-CX2DUM-016 59 E5DC/E5DC-B Model Number Legend Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks E5DC-@@ @ @ B M-@@@ (Example: E5DC-QX2ABM-002) -- - - - - --- A B C D E F Model A B Control No. of outputs 1 auxiliary and 2 outputs C Power supply voltage D E F Terminal type Input type Options Meaning E5DC 22.5 mm wide and mounts to DIN Track Control output 1 Control output 2 Relay output None Voltage output None (for driving SSR) Linear current output *1 None None 2 (one common) 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks Universal input HB alarm and HS alarm Communications ----1 RS-485 --RS-485 RX QX *1 CX 0 2 A D B M *2 *3 *4 000 002 015 *1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later. *2. Option 000 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected. *3. Options 002 and 017 can be selected only if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected. *4. Option 015 cannot be selected if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. List of Models Control output Relay output No. of auxiliary outputs 2 --- Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output 60 2 --2 --2 Options HB alarm and HS alarm Communications --Detection for single-phase heater ----Detection for single-phase heater --- --RS-485 --RS-485 --- --- RS-485 Model Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC E5DC-RX2ABM-000 Model Power supply voltage 24 VAC/DC E5DC-RX2DBM-000 E5DC-RX2ABM-002 E5DC-RX2DBM-002 E5DC-RX0ABM-015 E5DC-QX2ABM-000 E5DC-RX0DBM-015 E5DC-QX2DBM-000 E5DC-QX2ABM-002 E5DC-QX2DBM-002 E5DC-QX0ABM-015 E5DC-CX2ABM-000 E5DC-CX0ABM-015 E5DC-CX2ABM-015 E5DC-QX0DBM-015 E5DC-CX2DBM-000 E5DC-CX0DBM-015 E5DC-CX2DBM-015 E5DC/E5DC-B Optional Products (Order Separately) Terminal Unit End Plate Model E5DC-SCT1S Push-In Plus Terminal Unit Model PFP-M Spacer Model E5DC-SCT1B USB-Serial Conversion Cable Model PFP-S DIN Tracks Model E58-CIFQ2 Model PFP-100N PFP-50N Communications Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2-E Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool port. Current Transformers (CTs) Hole diameter 5.8 mm 5.8 mm 12.0 mm 12.0 mm Model E54-CT1 E54-CT1L* E54-CT3 E54-CT3L* Unit Labels Model Y92S-L2 End Cover Model Y92F-54 Connector Cover (for E5DC-B) Model E53-COV26 *Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use these CTs. Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-53 (2pcs) Short Bars (for E5DC) Model Y92S-P11 (4 pcs) CX-Thermo Support Software Model EST2-2C-MV4 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher is required for the E5DC. CX-Thermo version 4.69 or higher is required for the E5DC-B. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com). 61 E5DC/E5DC-B Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage Operating voltage range Power consumption Sensor input Input impedance Control method Relay output Control output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output Number of outputs A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage 4.9 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 2.8 VA max. at 24 VDC or 1.5 W max. at 24 VDC Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.) ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) Output voltage 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: Approx. 10,000 2 (depends on model) Auxiliary SPST-NO relay outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), output Output specifications Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value) Number of inputs 1 (depends on model) Contact input ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. Event input *1 External contact input Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max. specifications Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys 11-segment digital displays and individual indicators Indication method Character height: PV: 8.5 mm, SV: 8.0 mm Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or Multi SP serial communications. *2 Bank switching None Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, Other functions self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, *3 and work bit message *3 -10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: -10 to 50C with standard mounting (with Ambient operating temperature no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85% Storage temperature -25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing) Altitude 2,000 m max. Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1) *1. This function is not supported by the E5DC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 60. *2. Only two set points are selectable for event inputs. *3. Usage is possible for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later. 62 E5DC/E5DC-B Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs) Sensor type Platinum resistance thermometer Sensor specification Pt100 Infrared temperature sensor Thermocouple JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B C/W PLII 10 to 70C 60 to 120C 115 to 165C 120 165 140 to 260C 2300 2300 1800 1800 1700 1700 1700 1600 1500 Temperature range (C) 1400 1300 1300 1300 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 850 850 850 800 700 600 600 500.0 500 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 300 200 100.0 100 Set value 90 100 0.0 -100 -200 100.0 -200 -199.9 0 1 0.0 -199.9 2 3 -20.0 -100 -20.0 6 7 8 -200 4 5 0 0 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 -100 -200 -199.9 -200 9 10 11 -200 -199.9 -200 12 13 14 15 18 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Analog input Input type Input specification Setting range Set value Current Voltage 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V Usable in the following ranges by scaling: -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9, -19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999 25 26 27 28 0 to 10 V 29 63 E5DC/E5DC-B Alarm Types Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (See note.) Auxiliary outputs are allocated to alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed. To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1. Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON * 2 1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this SP deviation range. Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm X X 2 ON ON Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the OFF PV OFF PV (default) SP SP SP by the deviation or more. Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the X X ON ON 3 Lower-limit alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than OFF PV OFF PV SP SP the SP by the deviation or more. Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H Upper- and lower-limit limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON 3 * 4 OFF PV range *1 lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this SP deviation range. Set value 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Alarm type Upper- and lower-limit with ON OFF standby sequence *1 *5 Upper-limit with standby ON OFF sequence L Lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF X Absolute-value upperlimit ON OFF Absolute-value lower-limit ON OFF Absolute-value upperlimit with standby sequence ON OFF Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 12 13 LBA (alarm 1 type only) PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute-value upper-limit alarm ON OFF SP absolute-value lower-limit alarm ON OFF 15 H X SP SP PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 ON OFF 16 X 0 ON OFF A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6 PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6 X SP X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV ON OFF SP ON OFF X 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upperlimit alarm (8). *6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lowerlimit alarm (9). *6 X 0 SP X 0 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is lower than the alarm value (X). Standard Control X MV 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. ON OFF X 0 MV X MV 0 Standard Control X MV 0 Always ON ON OFF X 0 MV This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X). Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV) ON OFF 64 PV *7 *8 SP Standard Control 17 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X). Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV) ON OFF MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm *9 X - Standard Control MV absolute-value upper-limit alarm *9 A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit alarm (1). *6 *4 PV SP X 0 MV Always ON E5DC/E5DC-B *1. With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as "L" and "H." *2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Case 3 (Always OFF) Case 2 Case 1 H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| H SP L H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| L SP SP H L H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range Case 3 (Always ON) Case 2 Case 1 H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| SP L H H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L L SP SP H L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above at *2 * In cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if the upperand lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. * In case 3, the alarm is always OFF. *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit alarm with standby sequence The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby sequence. *7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the LBA. *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm. *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolutevalue upper-limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation. 65 E5DC/E5DC-B Characteristics Indication accuracy (when mounted individually, ambient temperature of 23C) Simple transfer output accuracy Influence of temperature *3 Influence of voltage *3 Influence of EMS. (at EN 61326-1) Installation influence (E5DC only) Input sampling period Hysteresis Proportional band (P) Integral time (I) Derivative time (D) Proportional band (P) for cooling Integral time (I) for cooling Derivative time (D) for cooling Control period Manual reset value Alarm setting range Influence of signal source resistance Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Malfunction Vibration Resistance Malfunction Shock Resistance Thermocouple: (0.3 % of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.*1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2 % of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. 0.3% FS max.*2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 1% FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. R, S, B, W, or PLII thermocouple: (1% of PV or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Other thermocouple: (1% of PV or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4 50 ms Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) -1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100 max.), Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10 max.) 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Main unit: Approx. 80 g, Models with Screw Terminal Unit: Approx. 40 g, Weight Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Unit: Approx. 40 g Degree of protection Main unit: IP20, Terminal unit: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher E5DC/E5DC-B bottom panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect a USB port on the computer. *6 Setup Tool port E5DC/E5DC-B front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable are used together to connect a USB port on the computer.*6 cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some Approved standards models only.) *7, Lloyd's standards (E5DC only) *8, EAC Standards Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM EMI: EN61326-1 *9 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN61326-1 *9 ESD Immunity: EN61000-4-2 EMC Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN61000-4-5 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN61000-4-11 *1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is 1% FS max. *3. Ambient temperature: -10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage *4. K thermocouple at -100C max.: 10C max. *5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter. *6. External serial communications (RS-485) and USB-Serial Conversion Cable communications can be used at the same time. *7. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models. *8. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 124 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards. *9. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2) 66 E5DC/E5DC-B Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Conforms to USB Specification 2.0 38,400 bps Computer: USB (Type A plug) Connector Digital Temperature Controller: Special specifications serial connector Power supply Bus power (Supplied from the USB host controller) *2 Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 450 mA max. 4.70.2 VDC (Supplied from USB-Serial Output voltage Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) 250 mA max. (Supplied from USB-Serial Output current Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ambient operating 0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) temperature Ambient operating 10% to 80% humidity Storage temperature -20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 120 g Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries. *1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. *2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Applicable OS Applicable software Applicable models USB interface standard DTE speed Communications Specifications Transmission line connection method Communications Synchronization method Protocol Baud rate * Transmission code Data bit length * Stop bit length * RS-485: Multidrop RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Start-stop synchronization CompoWay/F, or Modbus 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 57,600 bps ASCII 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Block check character (BCC) Error detection with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 with Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications 0 to 99 ms response wait time Default: 20 ms * The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Communications Functions You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The E5@C automatically performs communications with PLCs. No communications programming is required. Programless Number of connected Digital Temperature communica- Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series) Applicable PLCs tions *1 OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series, NJ Series, or NX1P Mitsubishi Electric PLCs MELSEC Q Series, L Series, FX3 Series, or iQ-R Series KEYENCE PLCs KEYENCE KV Series When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as Component the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that Communiare set as slaves. cations *1 Slope and offsets can be set for the set point. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (including master) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, Copying the parameters can be copied from the Digital *2 Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation. *1. A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for the FX Series or the KV Series. *2. Both the programless communications and the component communications support the copying. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings E54-CT1 E54-CT1L E54-CT3 E54-CT3L Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g Weight E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g E54-CT3 Only Accessories Armatures (2) None Plugs (2) Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms CT input (for heater Models with detection for single-phase current detection) heaters: One input Maximum heater current 50 A AC Input current 5% FS 1 digit max. indication accuracy Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3 SSR failure alarm setting 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4 range *2 *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). *2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Control Output Relay (Reference Values) Life (x 104 operations) USB-Serial Conversion Cable 500 300 100 50 30 10 5 E5DC/E5DC-B 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cos = 1 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switching current (A) 67 E5DC/E5DC-B External Connections E5DC (Models with Screw Terminal Blocks) Control output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. The E5DC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Relay outputs 250 VAC: 2 A (resistive load) E5DC SM (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) (3) Input Power Supply (1) Control Output 24 VAC/DC 100 to 240 VAC RX 1 1 QX 1 relay output 2 2 5 6 (no polarity) 1 5 9 2 6 10 5 6 R A(-) 3 4 A(-) EV1 9 10 11 CT1 + C - Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 * When connecting different potentials to auxiliary outputs 1 and 2, check the single fault condition of the common terminal before use. 8 3 7 4 8 016 One event input (-) 5 6 +Q - 7 015 Communications B(+) RS-485 1 linear current output (2) Auxiliary Outputs 11 002 Communications and 1 CT B(+) CX 1 voltage output (for driving SSR) (6) Options RS-485 (6) Terminal type 3 7 4 8 12 3 7 13 4 8 14 (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input TC 12 - 13 + 14 A B B Pt 12 13 14 I + 12 mA 13 14 V 12 V - 13 14 + 017 One event input and 1 CT (-) 3 EV1 4 7 CT1 8 Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3 crimped terminals. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). 6. The terminal layout is different than models with Push-In Plus terminal blocks. Check the terminal arrangement before wiring. 68 E5DC/E5DC-B E5DC-B (Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) Control output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. The E5DC-B is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Relay outputs 250 VAC: 2 A (resistive load) E5DC BM (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) Terminal type (3) Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC (6) 24 VAC/DC 1 1 2 2 (no polarity) 1 5 9 13 2 6 10 14 (6) Options (2) Auxiliary Outputs 14 10 B(+) A(-) Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 002 Communications and 1 CT RS-485 13 9 5 7 CT1 6 * When connecting different potentials to auxiliary outputs 1 and 2, check the single fault condition of the common terminal before use. 8 015 Communications B(+) RS-485 A(-) 5 7 6 8 (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input TC 3 7 11 15 4 8 12 16 Pt A 11 15 12 16 + B 11 15 12 16 B (1) Control Output RX QX 1 relay output CX 1 voltage output (for driving SSR) V I 1 linear current output + mA 3 R 3 4 4 +Q - 3 4 + C - 11 15 12 16 - 11 15 12 16 V + Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) on page 133 for wire specifications and wiring methods. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). 6. The terminal layout is different than models with screw terminal blocks. Check the terminal arrangement before wiring. 7. The event input specification main unit is not used with models with Push-In Plus terminal blocks. Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams E5DC E5DC-B Sensor input and CT input Sensor input and CT input Communications and event input Power supply Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output Communications Power supply Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output Relay output Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 : Reinforced insulation : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation : Functional isolation Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated. Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated. 69 E5DC/E5DC-B Nomenclature E5DC E5DC-B Front panel No. 1 display Operation indicators Bottom View of E5DC/E5DC-B PV or specified parameter No.2 display SP or specified parameter value Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level. Use the M Key to change to another parameter. Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level. Use the U D Keys to set the parameter. Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). 70 Front-panel Setup Tool port Bottompanel Setup Tool port E5DC/E5DC-B Dimensions (Unit: mm) Controllers E5DC (85) 81 4 22.5 22.5 +1.15 90 -0.2 +1.15 96 110 35 90 -0.2 4 The above figure shows the Terminal Unit attached to the Main Unit. Mounting Adapter (Y92F-53)(Order separately) E5DC-B 22.5 (6.5) Terminal Unit (E5DC-SCT1S) (90) 4 86 22.5 (6.5) +1.15 90 -0.2 96 35 110 +1.15 90 -0.2 4 The above figure shows the Push-In Plus Terminal Unit attached to the Main Unit. Mounting Adapter (Y92F-53)(Order separately) Push-In Plus Terminal Unit (E5DC-SCT1B) * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Mounted Separately Two-Unit Mounting 92 +0.8 0 Group Mounted (22.5 x number of units) +1.0 22.7 +0.3 0 0 45 +0.6 0 92 +0.8 0 92 +0.8 0 120 min * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * When two or more Digital Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. 71 E5DC/E5DC-B Accessories (Order Separately) Terminal Unit Push-In Plus Terminal Unit E5DC-SCT1S E5DC-SCT1B 22.5 22.5 30.7 90 +1.15 -0.2 (6.5) 36.2 90 +1.15 -0.2 35 35 4 4 USB-Serial Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2 (2110) 250 263 1510 LED (RD) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED (PWR) LED (SD) Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable (2110) (1510) 250 Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. 72 263 E58-CIFQ2 (Order separately) 1510 Conversion Cable E5DC/E5DC-B Current Transformers E54-CT1 21 Filler (epoxy) 15 5.8 dia. 7.5 Case 25 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L 2.8 Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 182 2.5 40 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 10.5 10 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 100V Frequency: 50 Hz 1k 10 Distortion factor 10% 1 3% 1% 100mV 100 10 RL=10 1 E54-CT1L 21 8 100V 15 10 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) Cable (AWG18) 1155 (12) Shrinkable tube Case (PBT) 5.8 dia. 25 Mark (yellow) Filler (epoxy) 2.5 10.5 40 5 10 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 73 E5DC/E5DC-B E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 30 Filler (epoxy) 12 dia. 9 Case (PBT) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 80.8 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 40 x 40 15 40 8 Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3 Accessories * Armature 30 Connection Example Approx. 3 dia. Frequency: 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 1k 500 10 1 100mV 100 50 RL=10 1 Lead 100V 10 1 18 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) * Plug Approx. 6 dia. (22) E54-CT3L 8 30 1005 Cable (AWG18) Case (PBT) 12.0 dia. Filler (epoxy) 40 40 15 Two, M3 (depth: 4) 8 30 74 100V 10 Armature Plug Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L E5DC/E5DC-B Mounting Adapters Short Bars Y92F-53 (Two included.) Y92S-P11 (Four included.) This accessory is not included with the product. Order it separately to mount the product to a panel. Use this product to connect between terminals (for power supplies, communications, etc.) when you use multiple E5DC Controllers. 27.5 34.7 2.4 22.5 12 24.8 11.8 9.4 0.8 3 5 End Plate DIN Tracks PFP-M PFP-100N PFP-50N 10 6.2 M4x8 pan head screw 1.8 1 50 35.5 35.3 1.8 11.5 10 M4 spring washer 7.30.15 1.3 4.8 4.5 350.3 15 25 10 25 25 1000 (500) * 10 25 15 (5) * 270.15 1 * Dimensions in parentheses are for the PFP-50N. Spacer Unit Labels PFP-S Y92S-L2 16 12 5 34.8 The Unit Labels for the Digital Panel Meter are used. Use either the C or F label from the sheet. 44.3 16.5 End Cover Y92F-54 (Two included.) 3.9 5.3 Use the End Cover when you mount the E5DC/E5DC-B to a panel to hide the gap between the Controller and the panel. 96 68 75 E5DC/E5DC-B Connector Cover E53-COV26 Male connector cover Female connector cover E5DC-B Push-In Plus Terminal Units are mounted with both a male and female connector cover (E53-COV26). Order the connector cover separately if it becomes lost or damaged. 76 MEMO 77 Programmable Temperature Controller (Digital Controller) E5CC-T (48 x 48 mm) Programmable Controllers Join the E5C Series! Program up to 256 segments can handle a wide variety of applications. * Set up to 8 Programs (Patterns) with 32 Segments (Steps) Each * The white PV display with a height of 15.2 mm improves visibility. * High-speed sampling at 50 ms. * Models are available with up to 3 auxiliary outputs, up to 4 event inputs, and a transfer output to cover a wide range of applications. * Short body with depth of only 60 mm. * Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). * Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Use component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each other. * * CSA conformance evaluation by UL. 48 x 48 mm E5CC-T Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable safety standards. Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122. Main I/O Functions Sensor Input Universal input * Thermocouple * Pt * Analog current/voltage E5CC-T Dual displays: PV/SV Control Output 1 * Relay output * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Linear current output Indication Accuracy * Thermocouple input: 0.3% of PV * Pt input: 0.2% of PV * Analog input: 0.2% of FS Control Output 2 * None * Voltage output (for driving SSR) Sampling Period * 50 ms Event Inputs * None *2 *4 Serial Communications * None * RS-485 4-digit displays * PF (shift) Key * Temperature status display * Operating and editing the program * Independent heating and cooling PID control * Parameter mask setting * Display brightness setting Auxiliary Outputs *3 Transfer Output * None *1 This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type Communications Manual (Cat. No. H186) 78 E5CC-T Model Number Legend and Standard Models Model Number Legend Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5CC-T @@3 @5 M -@@@ (Example: E5CC-TRX3A5M-000) ------ --- A BC D E F A Model Control outputs 1 and 2 B C D No. of Power Terminal auxiliary supply type outputs voltage E F Input type Options E5CC-T RX QX *1 CX QQ CQ 3 A D 5 M *1 000 001 *1 003 *3 004 005 006 Meaning 48 x 48 mm Programmable Type Control output 1 Control output 2 Relay output None Voltage output None (for driving SSR) Linear current output *2 None Voltage output Voltage output (for driving SSR) (for driving SSR) Voltage output Linear current output *2 (for driving SSR) 3 (one common) 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Screw terminal blocks (with cover) Universal input HB alarm CommunicaEvent Transfer and HS tions inputs output alarm --------1 --2 --2 (for 3phase RS-485 ----heaters) --RS-485 2 ------4 ------2 Provided. *1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001 and 003) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output. *2. The linear current output cannot be used as a transfer output. *3. Option 004 can be selected only when "CX" is selected for the control outputs. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling. (It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.) B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 79 E5CC-T Optional Products (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2 Terminal Covers Model E53-COV17 E53-COV23 (3pcs) Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV23 are provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. The E53-COV10 cannot be used. Refer to page 89 for the mounted dimensions. Waterproof Packing Model Y92S-P8 Note: The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Current Transformers (CTs) Hole diameter 5.8 mm 5.8 mm 12.0 mm 12.0 mm Model E54-CT1 E54-CT1L* E54-CT3 E54-CT3L* *Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use these CTs. Adapter Model Y92F-45 Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for an E5B@ Controller. Waterproof Cover Model Y92A-48N Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-49 Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. DIN Track Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-52 80 Front Covers Type Hard Front Cover Soft Front Cover Model Y92A-48H Y92A-48D CX-Thermo Support Software Model EST2-2C-MV4 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5CC-T. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com). E5CC-T Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage Operating voltage range Power consumption Sensor input Input impedance Control method Relay output Control output Auxiliary output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output Number of outputs Output specifications Number of inputs Event input External contact input specifications Transfer output Number of outputs Output specifications Setting method Indication method Bank switching Other functions Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Storage temperature Altitude Recommended fuse Installation environment A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage 7.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.) 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000 3 SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 3 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value) 2 or 4 (depends on model) Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact 1 (only on models with a transfer output) Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000 Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., resolution: Approx. 10,000 Digital setting using front panel keys 11-segment digital display and individual indicators Character height: PV: 15.2 mm, SV: 7.1 mm None Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting -10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: -10 to 50C with standard mounting (with no condensation or icing) 25 to 85% -25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing) 2,000 m max. T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1) 81 E5CC-T Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs) Sensor type Platinum resistance thermometer Sensor specification Pt100 Infrared temperature sensor Thermocouple JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B C/W PLII 10 to 70C 60 to 120C 115 to 165C 120 165 140 to 260C 2300 2300 1800 1800 1700 1700 1700 1600 Temperature range (C) 1500 1400 1300 1300 1300 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 850 850 850 800 700 600 600 500.0 500 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 300 200 100.0 100 0.0 -100 -200 100.0 90 100 0 -200 -199.9 0 1 Set value 0.0 199.9 2 3 -20.0 -100 -20.0 6 7 8 -200 4 5 0 0 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 -100 -200 -199.9 -200 9 10 11 12 -200 -199.9 -200 13 14 15 18 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Analog input Input type Input specification Setting range Set value 82 Current 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Voltage 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V Usable in the following ranges by scaling: -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9, -19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999 25 26 27 28 0 to 10 V 29 E5CC-T Alarm Types Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.) Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed. To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1. Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON 2 * 1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this SP deviation range. Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm X X 2 ON ON Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the OFF PV OFF PV (default) SP SP SP by the deviation or more. Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the X X ON ON 3 Lower-limit alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than OFF PV OFF PV SP SP the SP by the deviation or more. Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H Upper- and lower-limit limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON *3 4 OFF PV range *1 lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this SP deviation range. Set value Alarm type Upper- and lower-limit with ON OFF standby sequence *1 *5 Upper-limit with standby ON OFF sequence L 7 Lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF X 8 Absolute-value upperlimit ON OFF 9 Absolute-value lower-limit ON OFF 10 Absolute-value upperlimit with standby sequence ON OFF 11 Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 12 13 LBA (alarm 1 type only) PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute-value upper-limit alarm ON OFF 15 SP absolute-value lower-limit alarm ON OFF 5 6 H X SP SP PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 ON OFF 16 X 0 PV A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6 PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6 X SP X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV ON OFF SP ON OFF X 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upperlimit alarm (8). *6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lowerlimit alarm (9). *6 X 0 SP X 0 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is lower than the alarm value (X). Standard Control X MV 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. *7 *8 SP ON OFF X 0 MV X MV 0 Standard Control ON OFF 17 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X). Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV) ON OFF MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm *9 X - Standard Control MV absolute-value upper-limit alarm *9 A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit alarm (1). *6 *4 PV SP Standard Control X MV 0 Always ON ON OFF X 0 MV This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X). Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV) ON OFF X 0 MV Always ON 83 E5CC-T *1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as "L" and "H." *2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Case 2 Case 1 Case 3 (Always ON) H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| H SP L H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| SP L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| L SP H SP H L H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range Case 1 L Case 3 (Always OFF) Case 2 H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| SP L H H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L L SP SP H L 84 H<0, L<0 H<0, L>0 |H| |L| H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2 * Case 1 and 2 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. * Case 3: Always OFF *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. *6. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the operation of the standby sequence. *7. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA). *8. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the PV change rate alarm. *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation. E5CC-T Characteristics Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. 0.2% FS 1 digit max. Analog input: CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max. Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) Influence of temperature *2 1 digit max. Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *3 Influence of voltage *2 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Influence of EMS. Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max. (at EN 61326-1) CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. Input sampling period 50 ms Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Hysteresis Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) for cooling Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100 max.) Influence of signal source resistance Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10 max.) Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Weight Controller: Approx. 120 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 10 g Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher E5CC-T top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB port on Setup Tool port the computer. *5 cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some Approved standards models only.) *6 Standards Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM EMI: EN 61326-1 *7 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN 61326-1 *7 ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2 EMC Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11 *1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *2. Ambient temperature: -10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage *3. K thermocouple at -100C max.: 10C max. *4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter. *5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time. *6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models. *7. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2) Indication accuracy (at the ambient temperature of 23C) 85 E5CC-T Program Control Number of programs (patterns) Number of segments (steps) Segment setting method Segment times Alarm setting Reset operation Startup operation PID sets Number of sets Setting method Alarm SP function Program status control Wait operation Time signals Segment operation Program operation Wait method Wait width setting Number of outputs Number of ON/OFF Operations Setting method Program status output PV start Program startup operation Operation end operation Program SP shift 86 Standby 8 32 Time setting (Segment set with set point and time.) Slope setting (Segment set with segment type, set point, slope, and time.) 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min 0 min 0 s to 99 min 59 s Set separately for each program. Select either stopping control or fixed SP operation. Select continuing, resetting, manual operation, or run mode. 8 Set separately for each program (automatic PID group selection also supported). Select from ramp SP and target SP. Advance, segment jump, hold, and wait Program repetitions and program links Waiting at segment ends Same wait width setting for all programs 2 1 each per output Set separately for each program. Program end output (pulse width can be set), run output, stage output Select from segment 1 set point, slope-priority PV start 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min 0 day 0 h to 99 day 23h Select from resetting, continuing control at final set point, and fixed SP control. Same program SP shift for all programs E5CC-T Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Conforms to USB Specification 2.0. 38400 bps Computer: USB (type A plug) Connector Digital Temperature Controller: specifications Special serial connector Bus power (Supplied from USB host Power supply controller.) *2 Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 450 mA max. 4.70.2 VDC Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) 250 mA max. Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ambient operating 0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) temperature Ambient operating 10% to 80% humidity Storage temperature -20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 120 g Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries. *1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. *2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Applicable OS Applicable software Applicable models USB interface standard DTE speed Communications Specifications Transmission line connection method Communications Synchronization method Protocol Baud rate * Transmission code Data bit length * Stop bit length * RS-485: Multidrop RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Start-stop synchronization CompoWay/F, or Modbus 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps ASCII 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Error detection Block check character (BCC) with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications 0 to 99 ms response wait time Default: 20 ms * The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Communications Functions You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write E5@C-T parameters, start and reset operation, etc. The E5@C-T automatically performs communications with PLCs. No communications programming is required. Programless Number of connected Digital Temperature communica- Controllers: 32 max. Applicable PLCs tions * OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series, NJ Series, or NX1P Mitsubishi Electric PLCs MELSEC Q Series, L Series, or iQ-R Series When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as Component the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that Communica are set as slaves. tions Slope and offsets can be set for the set point. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (including master) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, the parameters can be copied from the Digital Copying * Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. * Both the programless communications and the component communications support the copying. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings E54-CT1 E54-CT3 Dielectric strength E54-CT1L E54-CT3L 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 Vibration resistance Weight E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g Accessories E54-CT3 Only Armatures (2) Plugs (2) None Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms CT input (for heater current detection) Models with detection for single-phase heaters: One input Models with detection for singlephase or three-phase heaters: Two inputs Maximum heater 50 A AC current Input current 5% FS 1 digit max. indication accuracy Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3 SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4 *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). *2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Relays (Reference Values) Life (x 104 operations) USB-Serial Conversion Cable 500 300 100 50 30 10 5 E5CC-T 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cos = 1 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 87 E5CC-T External Connections E5CC-T Control output 1 Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. (1) R Auxiliary outputs Control output 2 12 VDC, 21 mA CX OUT1 1 2 3 +Q - QQ 1 2 3 CQ Models with 2 Voltage Outputs (for Driving SSR) Models with 1 Linear Current Output OUT1 + C - 1 2 3 A B B Pt 4 5 6 (6) Options 001 Event inputs 1 and 2, and CT1 (-) 13 EV1 EV2 CT1 14 + mA - I 4 5 6 OUT1 V 4 - 5 V 6 + + C - OUT2 + Q Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, and 3 1 13 7 2 14 3 4 15 16 8 9 10 5 17 11 6 18 7 Auxiliary output 3 8 Auxiliary output 2 9 Auxiliary output 1 10 (3) Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC 12 11 12 12 (no polarity) 004 005 006 Communications (RS-485) and event inputs 3 and 4 Event inputs 1 to 4 Event inputs 1 and 2, and transfer output B(+) RS-485 A(-) 13 14 B(+) RS-485 A(-) 15 16 CT1 COM CT2 24 VAC/DC 11 Communications (RS-485), CT1, and CT2 16 18 (2) Auxiliary Outputs OUT1 1 2 3 003 15 17 Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current Output and Voltage (for Driving SSR) +Q - OUT2 +Q (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input TC 4 - 5 + 6 (6) The E5CC-T is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Relay output Models with 3 auxiliary outputs: 250 VAC: 2 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) Models with 1 Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) OUT1 1 2 3 5M (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type (1) Control outputs 1, 2 RX QX Models with 1 Relay Output 3 E5CC T 17 18 13 15 (-) EV3 EV4 (-) 14 16 EV1 EV2 (-) 17 18 EV3 EV4 13 14 15 (-) EV1 EV2 13 14 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 + +V I Transfer output - Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3 crimped terminals. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams Models with 3 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input and CT inputs Communications and event inputs Power supply Voltage output (for driving SSR), linear current output, and transfer output Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3 : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 are not insulated. 88 E5CC-T Nomenclature E5CC-T Front panel Temperature unit Operation indicators No. 1 display PV or specified monitor/setting parameter Top View of E5CC-T No. 2 display Press O Key once to go to Program Setting Level. SP or specified monitor/parameter value Top-panel Setup Tool port Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level. Use the UD Keys to set the parameter. Press U Key for at least 1 second when Process value/Set point parameter are displayed in Program SP Mode to go to Display Segment Selection parameter in Program Setting Level. Use the M Key to change to another parameter. Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at least 1 second to switch between run and reset status. Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). Dimensions (Unit: mm) Controllers E5CC-T 48 x 48 4 1 Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted (64) 60 (48 x number of units - 2.5)+1.0 0 48 x 48 58 45+0.6 0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. 60 min. 45+0.6 0 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P8 (also available for ordering separately)) Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-49 (also available for ordering separately)) 45+0.6 0 The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller. It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection. Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure. * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. Note: Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller. * Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together. 89 E5CC-T Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2 (2110) 250 263 1510 LED (RD) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED (PWR) LED (SD) Terminal Covers E53-COV17 48 E53-COV23 (Three Covers provided.) 2 48.8 3.8 10 Terminal Cover (E53-COV23) 44.8 22 9.1 Waterproof Packing Y92S-P8 (for DIN 48 x 48) 90 The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection. (Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider three years as a rough standard.) E5CC-T Current Transformers E54-CT1 21 Filler (epoxy) 15 5.8 dia. 7.5 Case 25 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L 2.8 Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 182 2.5 40 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 10.5 10 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 100V Frequency: 50 Hz 1k 10 Distortion factor 10% 1 3% 1% 100mV 100 10 RL=10 1 E54-CT1L 21 8 100V 15 10 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) Cable (AWG18) 1155 (12) Shrinkable tube Case (PBT) 5.8 dia. 25 Mark (yellow) Filler (epoxy) 2.5 10.5 40 5 10 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 91 E5CC-T E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 30 Filler (epoxy) 12 dia. 9 Case (PBT) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 80.8 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 40 x 40 15 40 8 Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3 Accessories * Armature 30 Connection Example Approx. 3 dia. Frequency: 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 1k 500 10 1 100mV 100 50 RL=10 1 Lead 100V 10 1 18 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) * Plug Approx. 6 dia. (22) E54-CT3L 8 30 1005 Cable (AWG18) Case (PBT) 12.0 dia. Filler (epoxy) 40 40 15 Two, M3 (depth: 4) 8 30 92 100V 10 Armature Plug Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L E5CC-T Adapter Y92F-45 Note: 1. Use this Adapter when the Front Panel has already been prepared for the E5B@. 2. Only black is available. 3. You cannot use the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable if you use the Y92F-45 Adapter. To use the USB-Serial Conversion Cable to make the settings, do so before you mount the Temperature Controller in the panel. 4. You cannot use this Adapter together with the Y92F-49 Adapter that is provided with the E5CC-T Temperature Controller. Fixture (Accessory) 76 4.7 69.6 to 77.6 72 x 72 67 x 67 87 Mounted to E5CC-T Panel (1 to 8 mm) 72 x 72 Mounting Adapter Y92F-30 (Accessory) 48 x 48 2.2 4.7 62.8 To back of the E5CC-T DIN Track Mounting Adapter Y92F-52 Note: This Adapter cannot be used together with the Terminal Cover. Remove the Terminal Cover to use the Adapter. 61 3.5 This Adapter is used to mount the E5CC-T to a DIN Track. If you use the Adapter, there is no need for a plate to mount in the panel or to drill mounting holes in the panel. 38 50 Mounted to E5CC-T 48 80.5 93 E5CC-T Watertight Cover Mounting Adapter Y92A-48N Y92F-49 21.9 14 The Mounting Adapter is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it becomes lost or damaged. (2) 87.7 69 79.2 12 67.6 28.9 Protective Cover Y92A-48D Protective Cover Note: This Protective Cover cannot be used if the Waterproof Packing is installed. This Protective Cover is soft type. It is able to operate the controller with using this cover. 94 Y92A-48H This Protective Cover is hard type. Please use it for the mis-operation prevention etc. MEMO 95 Programmable Temperature Controller (Digital Controller) E5EC-T/E5AC-T (48 x 96 mm/96 x 96 mm) Programmable Controllers Join the E5C Series! Program up to 256 segments can handle a wide variety of applications. * Set up to 8 Programs (Patterns) with 32 Segments (Steps) Each * A white LCD PV display with a height of approx. 18 mm for the E5ECT and 25 mm for the E5AC-T improves visibility. * Tool ports are provided both on the top panel and the front panel. Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). * High-speed sampling at 50 ms. * Models are available with up to 4 auxiliary outputs, up to 6 event inputs, and a transfer output to cover a wide range of applications. * Short body with depth of only 60 mm. * Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Use component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each other. * The new position-proportional control models allow you to control valves as well. * * CSA conformance evaluation by UL. 48 x 96 mm E5EC-T 96 x 96 mm E5AC-T Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable safety standards. Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122. Main I/O Functions Sensor Input Universal input * Thermocouple * Pt * Analog current/voltage E5EC-T E5AC-T Three-level Display Simultaneous display of the PV, SP, Program No., Segment No., etc. 4-digit displays Indication Accuracy Control Output 1 * Relay output * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Linear current output * Thermocouple input: 0.3% of PV * Pt input: 0.2% of PV * Analog input: 0.2% of FS Sampling Period * 50 ms Event Inputs * None *2 *4 *6 Serial Communications * None * RS-485 * PF (shift) Key * Setup Tool port on front panel * Temperature status display * Operating and editting the program * Independent heating and cooling PID control * Parameter mask setting * Display brightness setting Control Output 2 * Voltage output (for driving SSR) * Relay output * Linear current output Auxiliary Outputs *4 Transfer Output * None *1 This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type Communications Manual (Cat. No. H186) 96 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Model Number Legend and Standard Models Model Number Legend Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5EC-T@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5EC-TRX4A5M-000) --- - - - --- A B C D E F E5AC-T@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5AC-TRX4A5M-000) ---- - - --- A B C D E F A Model Control outputs 1 and 2 B No. of auxiliary outputs C D E F Power Terminal Input Options supply type type voltage 48 x 96 mm Programmable Type 96 x 96 mm Programmable Type Control output 1 Control output 2 Relay output None Voltage output None (for driving SSR) Linear current output None Voltage output Voltage output (for driving SSR) (for driving SSR) Voltage output Relay output (for driving SSR) Relay output Relay output Linear current output Linear current output Voltage output Linear current output (for driving SSR) Position-proportional relay Position-proportional output relay output 4 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 with same common) 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC Screw terminal blocks (with cover) Universal input E5EC-T E5AC-T RX QX *2 CX QQ QR RR *2 CC *2 CQ PR 4 A D 5 Control outputs 1 and 2 For RX, For CX or QX, QQ, For PR QR, RR, or CC CQ Selectable Selectable Selectable Option Selectable Selectable selection Selectable conditions *1 Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Meaning M HB alarm and HS alarm 000 004 005 008 010 019 021 022 ------1 1 1 ----- Communications --RS-485 --RS-485 ------RS-485 Event Transfer output inputs --2 4 2 4 6 6 4 ----------Provided. Provided. Provided. *1. The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output. *2. The linear current output cannot be used as a transfer output. Heating and Cooling Control Using Heating and Cooling Control A Control Output Assignment If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling. (It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.) B Control If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling. This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics. 97 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Optional Products (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2 Communications Conversion Cable Model E58-CIFQ2-E Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool port. Terminal Covers Model E53-COV24 (3pcs) Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV24 are provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproof Packing Applicable Controller Model E5EC-T Y92S-P9 E5AC-T Y92S-P10 Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproof Cover Applicable Controller E5EC-T E5AC-T Model Y92A-49N Y92A-96N Front Port Cover Model Y92S-P7 Note: This Front Port Cover is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. Mounting Adapter Model Y92F-51 (2pcs) Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature Controller. 98 Current Transformers (CTs) Hole diameter 5.8 mm 5.8 mm 12.0 mm 12.0 mm Model E54-CT1 E54-CT1L* E54-CT3 E54-CT3L* *Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use these CTs. CX-Thermo Support Software Model EST2-2C-MV4 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5EC-T/ E5AC-T. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com). E5EC-T/E5AC-T Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage Operating voltage range Power consumption E5EC-T E5AC-T Sensor input Input impedance Control method Relay output Control output Auxiliary output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output Number of outputs Output specifications Number of inputs Event input External contact input specifications Transfer output Number of outputs Output specifications Potentiometer input Setting method Indication method Bank switching Other functions Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Storage temperature Altitude Recommended fuse Installation environment A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage 8.7 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.5 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.2 W max. at 24 VDC 9.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.6 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.4 W max. at 24 VDC Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.) 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value) Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit (The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.) 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000 4 SPST-NO. relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value) 2, 4 or 6 (depends on model) Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact 1 (only on models with a transfer output) Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 500 max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000 Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., Resolution: Approx. 10,000 100 to 10 k Digital setting using front panel keys 11-segment digital display and individual indicators Character height: E5EC-T: PV: 18.0 mm, SV: 11.0 mm, MV: 7.8 mm E5AC-T: PV: 25.0 mm, SV: 15.0 mm, MV: 9.5 mm Three displays. Contents: PV, SP, program No. and segment No., remaining segment time, or MV (valve opening) Numbers of digits: 4 digits None Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting -10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: -10 to 50C with standard mounting (with no condensation or icing) 25 to 85% -25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing) 2,000 m max. T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1) 99 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs) Sensor type Platinum resistance thermometer Sensor specification Pt100 Infrared temperature sensor Thermocouple JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B C/W PLII 10 to 70C 60 to 120C 115 to 165C 120 165 140 to 260C 2300 2300 1800 1800 1700 1700 1700 1600 1500 Temperature range (C) 1400 1300 1300 1300 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 850 850 850 800 700 600 600 500.0 500 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 300 200 100.0 100 0.0 -100 -200 100.0 90 100 0 -200 -199.9 0 1 Set value 0.0 199.9 2 3 -20.0 -100 -20.0 6 7 8 -200 4 5 0 0 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 20 21 22 23 24 -100 -200 -199.9 -200 9 10 11 12 -200 -199.9 -200 13 14 15 18 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Analog input Input type Input specification Setting range Set value 100 Current 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Voltage 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V Usable in the following ranges by scaling: -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9, -19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999 25 26 27 28 0 to 10 V 29 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Alarm Types Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.) Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed. To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1. Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm 2 * 1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 ON OFF PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this SP deviation range. Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm X X 2 ON ON Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the OFF PV OFF PV (default) SP SP SP by the deviation or more. Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the X X ON ON 3 Lower-limit alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than OFF PV OFF PV SP SP the SP by the deviation or more. Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper L H Upper- and lower-limit limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm ON *3 4 OFF PV range *1 lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this SP deviation range. Set value 5 6 Alarm type Upper- and lower-limit with ON OFF standby sequence *1 *5 Upper-limit with standby ON OFF sequence 7 Lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 8 Absolute-value upperlimit ON OFF 9 Absolute-value lower-limit ON OFF 10 Absolute-value upperlimit with standby sequence ON OFF 11 Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence ON OFF 12 13 LBA (alarm 1 type only) PV change rate alarm 14 SP absolute-value upper-limit alarm ON OFF 15 SP absolute-value lower-limit alarm ON OFF L H SP X SP PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF PV ON OFF X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 ON OFF 16 X 0 PV A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6 PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6 X SP X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV X 0 PV ON OFF SP ON OFF X 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upperlimit alarm (8). *6 A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lowerlimit alarm (9). *6 X 0 SP X 0 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is higher than the alarm value (X). This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP) is lower than the alarm value (X). Standard Control X MV 0 The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. *7 *8 SP ON OFF X 0 MV X MV 0 Standard Control ON OFF 17 SP This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X). Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV) ON OFF MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm *9 X - Standard Control MV absolute-value upper-limit alarm *9 ON OFF PV X SP A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit alarm (1). *6 *4 PV Standard Control X MV 0 Always ON ON OFF X 0 MV This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X). Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV) ON OFF X 0 MV Always ON 101 E5EC-T/E5AC-T *1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as "L" and "H." *2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Case 2 Case 1 Case 3 (Always ON) H<0, L<0 L H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| H SP L H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| SP L H<0, L>0 |H| |L| L SP H SP H L H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range Case 1 L Case 3 (Always OFF) Case 2 H SP H<0, L>0 |H| < |L| SP L H H H>0, L<0 |H| > |L| H SP L L SP SP H L 102 H<0, L<0 H<0, L>0 |H| |L| H>0, L<0 |H| |L| *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2 * Case 1 and 2 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. * Case 3: Always OFF *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. *6. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the operation of the standby sequence. *7. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA). This setting cannot be used with a position-proportional model. *8. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the PV change rate alarm. *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling operation. E5EC-T/E5AC-T Characteristics Indication accuracy (at the ambient temperature of 23C) Transfer output accuracy Influence of temperature *2 Influence of voltage *2 Influence of EMS. (at EN 61326-1) Input sampling period Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. Potentiometer input: 5% FS 1 digit max. 0.3% FS max. Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *3 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max. 50ms Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C orF) Hysteresis Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Standard, heating/cooling, or Position-proportional (Close): 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in Integral time (I) units of 0.1 s) Position-proportional (Floating): 1 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.1 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F) Proportional band (P) for cooling Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4 Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Influence of signal source Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100 max.) resistance Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10 max.) Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions E5EC-T Controller: Approx. 210 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g x 2 Weight E5AC-T Controller: Approx. 250 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g x 2 Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher E5EC-T/E5AC-T top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB port on the computer.*5 Setup Tool port E5EC-T/E5AC-T front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable are used together to connect to a USB port on the computer.*5 cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some Approved standards models only.) *6 Standards Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM EMI EN 61326-1 *7 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN 61326-1 *7 ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2 EMC Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11 *1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *2. Ambient temperature: -10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage *3. K thermocouple at -100C max.: 10C max. *4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter. *5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time. *6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models. *7. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2) 103 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Program Control Number of programs (patterns) Number of segments (steps) Segment setting method Segment times Alarm setting Reset operation Startup operation PID sets Number of sets Setting method Alarm SP function Program status control Wait operation Time signals Segment operation Program operation Wait method Wait width setting Number of outputs Number of ON/OFF Operations Setting method Program status output PV start Program startup operation Operation end operation Program SP shift 104 Standby 8 32 Time setting (Segment set with set point and time.) Slope setting (Segment set with segment type, set point, slope, and time.) 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min 0 min 0 s to 99 min 59 s Set separately for each program. Select either stopping control or fixed SP operation. Select continuing, resetting, manual operation, or run mode. 8 Set separately for each program (automatic PID group selection also supported). Select from ramp SP and target SP. Advance, segment jump, hold, and wait Program repetitions and program links Waiting at segment ends Same wait width setting for all programs 2 1 each per output Set separately for each program. Program end output (pulse width can be set), run output, stage output Select from segment 1 set point, slope-priority PV start 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min 0 day 0 h to 99 day 23h Select from resetting, continuing control at final set point, and fixed SP control. Same program SP shift for all programs E5EC-T/E5AC-T Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Conforms to USB Specification 2.0. 38400 bps Computer: USB (type A plug) Connector Digital Temperature Controller: specifications Special serial connector Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.) *2 Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 450 mA max. 4.70.2 VDC Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) 250 mA max. Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ambient operating 0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) temperature Ambient operating 10% to 80% humidity Storage temperature -20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 120 g Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries. *1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. *2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Applicable OS Applicable software Applicable models USB interface standard DTE speed Communications Specifications Transmission line connection method Communications Synchronization method Protocol Baud rate * Transmission code Data bit length * Stop bit length * RS-485: Multidrop RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Start-stop synchronization CompoWay/F, or Modbus 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps ASCII 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Error detection Block check character (BCC) with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications 0 to 99 ms response wait time Default: 20 ms * The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Communications Functions You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write E5@C-T parameters, start and reset operation, etc. The E5@C-T automatically performs communications with PLCs. No communications programming is required. Programless Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: communica32 max. * tions Applicable PLCs OMRON PLCs Mitsubishi Electric PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series, NJ Series, or NX1P MELSEC Q Series, L Series, or iQ-R Series When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as Component the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that Communic are set as slaves. ations Slope and offsets can be set for the set point. Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers: 32 max. (including master) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected, the parameters can be copied from the Digital Copying * Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. * Both the programless communications and the component communications support the copying. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings E54-CT1 E54-CT1L E54-CT3 E54-CT3L Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g Weight E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g E54-CT3 Only Accessories Armatures (2) None Plugs (2) Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms CT input (for heater Models with detection for single-phase current detection) heaters: One input Maximum heater 50 A AC current Input current 5% FS 1 digit max. indication accuracy Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3 SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4 *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). *2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s. Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Relays (Reference Values) Life (x 104 operations) USB-Serial Conversion Cable 500 300 E5EC-T/E5AC-T 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cos = 1 100 50 30 10 5 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switching current (A) 105 E5EC-T/E5AC-T External Connections E5EC-T/E5AC-T 4 E5EC T (1) 5M (2) (3) (4) (5) 4 E5AC T (6) (1) 5M (2) (3) (4) (5) Terminal type (6) Terminal type Control output 1 Control output 2 Relay output 250 VAC, 5A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 40 mA 21 mA if there are two control outputs Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Auxiliary outputs Relay output 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Linear current output 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. Load: 500 max. Relay output Models with 4 auxiliary outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load) Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses. (6) Options 005 008 010 004 Four event inputs Communications Four event inputs Communications, two and two event inputs event inputs, and one CT and one CT B(+) B(+) (-) (-) 13 13 13 13 RS-485 RS-485 14 14 14 14 EV3 EV3 A(-) A(-) 15 15 15 15 EV4 EV4 (-) (-) (-) 16 16 16 16 (-) 17 17 17 17 EV1 EV1 EV1 EV1 18 18 18 18 EV2 EV2 EV2 EV2 19 19 19 19 CT1 CT1 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 (1)Control Outputs RX QX Models with Models with 1 1 Relay Output Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) OUT1 3 4 5 R 6 OUT1 +Q - 3 4 5 (3) Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC 6 CX QQ Models with 1 Linear Current Output 5 6 RR/PR OUT1 OUT2 OUT1 3 4 R 5 6 R OUT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 +Q - 4 5 6 +Q - OUT2 R CQ Models with 2 Linear Current Outputs 2 (no polarity) OUT1 3 +Q - CC Models with 2 Relay Outputs 1 2 Models with Voltage Output (for Driving SSR) and Relay Output Models with 2 Voltage Outputs (for Driving SSR) OUT1 3 + C - 4 5 6 3 4 QR Models with 2 Output: Linear Current Output and Voltage (for Driving SSR) OUT1 3 4 + C - 3 4 + OUT1 - C 5 6 OUT2 + C - 5 6 + OUT2 - Q 24 VAC/DC 1 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 (2) Auxiliary Outputs (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input Auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 TC Auxiliary output 4 Auxiliary output 3 22 - 23 + 24 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 Pt A 22 B 23 B 24 I + 22 mA 23 - 24 V 22 - 23 V 24 + 019 Six event inputs, one CT, and transfer output (-) 13 (-) EV5 EV6 + Transfer V + I output - EV1 EV2 CT1 021 Six event inputs and transfer output (-) (-) Potentiometer input 19 O 20 W 21 C 28 29 30 31 32 33 EV3 EV4 (-) EV5 EV6 + Transfer V + I output - 28 29 30 31 32 33 EV3 EV4 (-) EV1 EV2 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 022 Communications, four event inputs, and transfer output B(+) 13 RS-485 14 A(-) 15 (-) 16 28 (-) EV5 EV6 + Transfer V + I output - 29 30 31 17 18 19 32 33 20 21 EV1 EV2 The E5@C-T is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will not occur if the input type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type. Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. 2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background. 3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible. 4. Connect M3 crimped terminals. 5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring). Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs Sensor input, CT input, potentiometer input, and remote SP input Communications and event inputs Power Supply Voltage output (for driving SSR), linear current output, and transfer output Relay output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Auxiliary outputs 3, 4 : Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 are not insulated. 106 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Nomenclature E5EC-T Front panel No. 1 display Temperature unit Top View of E5EC-T PV or specified monitor/parameter Operation indicators No. 2 display Top-panel Setup Tool port SP or specified monitor/parameter value No. 3 display Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). Program No., segment No., remaining segment time, or MV (valve opening). Use the U D Keys to set the parameter. Front-panel Setup Tool port Press U Key for at least 1 second when Process value/Set point parameter are displayed in Program SP Mode to go to Display Segment Selection parameter in Program Setting Level. Press O Key once to go to Program Setting Level. Use the M Key to change to another parameter. Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level. Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at least 1 second to switch between run and reset status. E5AC-T Front Panel Temperature unit Operation indicators Top View of E5AC-T No. 1 display PV or specified monitor/parameter No. 2 display SP or specified monitor/parameter value Front-panel Setup Tool port No. 3 display Program No. and segment No., remaining segment time, or MV (valve opening). Press the O Key once to go to the Program Setting Level. Press the O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to the Initial Setting Level. Press the M Key to switch to another parameter. Press the U or D Key to set the parameter. Top-panel Setup Tool port Press U Key for at least 1 second when Process value/Set point parameter are displayed in Program SP Mode to go to Display Segment Selection parameter in Program Setting Level. Press the S Key to change the digit (default setting). Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at least 1 second to change between run and reset status. 107 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Dimensions (Unit: mm) Controllers E5EC-T 48 (64) 60 4 1 44 96 91 110 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P9 (also available for ordering separately)) Mounted Separately * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USBSerial Conversion Cable and E58CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-51 (also available for ordering separately)) Group Mounted * (48 x number of units - 2.5)+1.0 0 45+0.6 0 * Selections for Control Outputs 1 and 2: QQ, QR, RR, CC, PR, or CQ If you also specify 019, 021, 022 for the option selection and use group mounting, the ambient temperature must be 45C or less. Maintain the following spacing when more than one Digital Controller is installed at an ambient temperature of 55C. 92+0.8 0 60 min. 45-0.6 0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. 120 min. 92+0.8 0 92-0.8 0 120 min. * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. 108 E5EC-T/E5AC-T E5AC-T (64) 60 4 1 96 x 96 91 x 91 110 Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P10 (also available for ordering separately)) Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-51 (also available for ordering separately)) * Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.) Group Mounted Mounted Separately (96 x number of units - 3.5)+1.0 0 92+0.8 0 92+0.8 0 * Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm. * Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) * To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. * When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. 120 min. 92+0.8 0 109 E5EC-T/E5AC-T Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2 (2110) 250 263 1510 LED (RD) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED (PWR) LED (SD) Conversion Cable E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable (2110) (1510) 250 Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. 263 E58-CIFQ2 (Order Separately) Terminal Covers Waterproof Packing E53-COV24 (Three Covers provided.) Y92S-P9 (for DIN 48 x 96) 2 3.8 10 91 Y92S-P10 (for DIN 96 x 96) Mounting Adapter Y92S-P7 Y92F-51 (Two Adapters provided.) 110 Conversion Cable The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller. Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used is IP66. Also, keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port of the E5EC-T/E5AC-T securely closed. To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. The replacement period will vary with the operating environment. Check the required period in the actual application. Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline. Setup Tool Port Cover for top panel Order this Port Cover separately if the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port is lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing must be periodically replaced because it may deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. 1510 One pair is provided with the Controller. Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it becomes lost or damaged. E5EC-T/E5AC-T Watertight Cover Watertight Cover Y92A-49N (48 x 96) Y92A-96N (96 x 96) 21.9 21.9 (2) (2) 131.7 131.7 67.6 115.6 28.9 28.9 Current Transformers E54-CT1 21 Filler (epoxy) 15 5.8 dia. 7.5 Case 25 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L 2.8 Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 182 2.5 40 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 10.5 10 5 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 100V Frequency: 50 Hz 1k 10 Distortion factor 10% 1 3% 1% 100mV 100 10 RL=10 1 E54-CT1L 21 8 100V 15 10 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) Cable (AWG18) 1155 (12) Shrinkable tube Case (PBT) 5.8 dia. 25 Mark (yellow) Filler (epoxy) 2.5 10.5 40 5 10 Two, 3.5 dia. 30 111 E5EC-T/E5AC-T E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 30 Filler (epoxy) 12 dia. 9 Case (PBT) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 4002 Winding resistance: 80.8 Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 40 x 40 15 40 8 Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3 Accessories * Armature 30 Connection Example Approx. 3 dia. Frequency: 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 1k 500 10 1 100mV 100 50 RL=10 1 Lead 100V 10 1 18 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) * Plug Approx. 6 dia. (22) E54-CT3L 8 30 1005 Cable (AWG18) Case (PBT) 12.0 dia. Filler (epoxy) 40 40 15 Two, M3 (depth: 4) 8 30 112 100V 10 Armature Plug Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L MEMO 113 E5@C/E5@C-T Operation Setting Levels Diagram E5C This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Press the O + M Keys for at least 1 s Only when Manual Mode was used just before power OFF Used to set protection for operations. Operation in progress Power ON Press the O Key for at least 1 s or the S Key for at least 1 s*1 Manual Control Level Used to set the MV manually. Press the O + M Keys for at least 3 s.*2 Level changes automatically. Press the O Key once. Operation Level O Key for at least 3 s while a-m is displayed.*2 Protect Level Used to change adjustment parameters (PID constants, adjustment sensitivity, etc.). Used for SP, alarm values, and other basic settings and monitoring. Press the S Key.*3 Press the S Key.*3 S Key for at least 1 s*1 Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Adjustment Level Press the O Key for at least 3 s*2 Monitor/Setting Item Level Used to display specified monitor and setting items. Control and auxiliary outputs stop. Initial Setting Level Press the O Key for less than 1 s. (models with communications only). Stopped Used to set the input type and other basic settings. Release protection and then enter the password (-169) for the amoV (Move to Advanced Setting Level) Advanced parameter. Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Function Setting Level Used to set application functions. Enter the password (1201) while cmov (Move to Calibration Level parameter) is displayed. Calibration Level *1. Set the PF Setting parameter to a-m (Auto/Manual). *2. The No. 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer. *3. Set the PF Setting parameter to pfdp (monitor/setting items). 114 Communications Setting Level Used to set up communications. E5@C/E5@C-T E5C-T This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Press O and M Keys for at least 1 s. Protect Level Used to set protection for operations. Starting in manual mode Power ON Press O and M Keys for at least 3 s.*2 Operation in progress Level changes automatically. Manual Control Level Press O or S Key for at least 1 s.*1 Press S Key.*3 Operation Level Used to set the MV manually. Press O Key for at least 3 s while a-m is displayed.*2 Press O Key for less than 1 s. Used for SPs and other basic settings and monitoring. Press S Key for at least 1 s.*1 Program Setting Level Parameter and segment settings for all programs Press O Key for less than 1 s. Press O Key for at least 1 s. Press O Key for less than 1 s. Press O Key for less than 1 s. PID Setting Level Parameters for all PID sets (e.g., PID constants) Adjustment Level Adjustment parameters (e.g., PID constants for current PID set) Press S Key.*3 Press O Key for at least 3 s.*2 Monitor/Setting Item Level Used to display specified monitor and setting items. Control and auxiliary outputs stop. Initial Setting Level Press O Key for less than 1 s (only models with communications). Stopped Used to set the input type and other basic settings. Release protection and then enter the password (-169) for the amoV (Move to Advanced Function Setting Level) parameter. Communications Setting Level Communications settings Press O Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level Advanced settings Enter the password (1201) while cmov (Move to Calibration Level parameter) is displayed. Calibration Level *1. Set the PF Setting parameter to a-m (Auto/Manual). *2. The No. 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer. *3. Set the PF Setting parameter to pfdp (monitor/setting items). 115 E5@C/E5@C-T Operation Parameters E5@C The following pages describe the parameters set in each level. Pressing the M (Mode) Key at the last parameter in each level returns to the top parameter in that level. Some parameters may not be displayed depending on the model and other settings. Press the S Key*2 Power ON Starting in Manual Mode. Manual Control Level Press the S Key for at least 1 s. *1 C Press the O Key or the S Key for at least 1 s. *1 PID Control only 25 0 PV/MV Adjustment Level l.adj Adjustment Level Display Displayed only once when entering adjustment level. at AT Execute/Cancel Process Value Input 0.0 Shift off Communications Writing SP Mode lsp 0.0 Heater Current 1 Value Monitor 0.0 ct2 0.0 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor 0.0 Heater Burnout Detection 2 0.0 Leakage Current 1 Monitor HS Alarm 1 c-d 50.0 40 M 0.0 Leakage Current 2 Monitor HS Alarm 2 50.0 SP 0 Dead Band chys Manual Reset Value Hysteresis (Heating) soak Hysteresis (Cooling) 0 wt-b Soak Time 0 mv-s SP 5 mv-e 0 sprt M sp-7 sprl SP 7 MV Upper Limit 0 M ol-l 0.0 M Work Bit 5 ON Delay MV Lower Limit M Heater Current 1 Value Monitor M r-s al3l M Leakage Current 1 Monitor al-4 Leakage Current 2 Monitor al4h Program Start al4l 0 0 o Work Bit 7 ON Delay c-o 0.0 M Alarm Value 1 v-m 0.0 Move to Protect Level: Displayed only when a password is set. Operation/Adjustment Protect M wtpt Setting Change Protect off M pfpt PF Key Protect off Communications Monitor M chgp Changed Parameters Only off M pmsk Parameter Mask Enable on to Move to prlp Password Protect Level 0 M Control Period (Cooling) M orev Direct/Reverse Operation or-r M alt1 Alarm 1 Type 2 M alh1 Alarm 1 0.2 Hysteresis Valve Opening Monitor M alt2 Alarm 2 Type 2 M alh2 Press the O Key less than 1 s. 0.2 Communications Setting Level Displayed only for models with communications. Changes are effective after cycling power or after a software reset. Alarm 2 Hysteresis M * Used with programless communications up 1 Protocol Setting: Switches between cwf CompoWay/F and Modbus. psel M 1 Initial Setting/Communications 1 Control Period (Heating) 20 MV Monitor (Cooling) u-no 0 icpt Protect Work Bit 8 OFF Delay 20 M c-cp MV Monitor (Heating) Press the O and M Keys for at least 1 s. M M Alarm Value Upper Limit M oapt Work Bit 7 OFF Delay off M cp M RUN/STOP Protect Level 0 Alarm Value 4 M The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the "Move to protect level time" setting. pmov on M ptrn Program Pattern Alarm Value Lower Limit 0 4 0.0 Press the O and M Keys for at least 3 s. Work Bit 6 OFF Delay Alarm Value Lower Limit M Soak Time Remain Standard or Heating/Cooling M st ST (Self-tuning) 0 4 M Work Bit 6 ON Delay stnd M M al-1 M s-hc 0 3 M 116 M Heater Current 2 Value Monitor M sktr onof Alarm Value Upper Limit 0 3 M prst M cntl PID ON/OFF Alarm Value 3 al3h M lcr2 Work Bit 5 OFF Delay M plcm 100.0 0 SP Lower Limit -200 M M lcr1 M sl-l M run M 0 M ol-h Work Bit 4 OFF Delay M w8of same al-3 0 w8on SP Ramp Fall Value Set Point During SP Ramp rset Work Bit 4 ON Delay Work Bit 8 0 ON Delay off M 0 SP Ramp Set Value Work Bit 3 OFF Delay M 0 M SP 6 M ct2 0.0 M w7of 0.0 Work Bit 3 ON Delay M 0 MV at PV Error ct1 0.0 M w7on 0.0 M M MV at Stop M 1300 Alarm Value Lower Limit 0 2 al2l M sp-m M sl-h SP Upper Limit Alarm Value Upper Limit M Remote SP Monitor Temperature Unit c 0 2 0.0 M w6of M 0 sp-6 w5on al2h M rsp 0 M d-u Alarm Value 2 M Multi-SP 0 M 0 M sp-5 w4of al-2 M m-sp M Decimal Point dp Alarm Value Lower Limit M Auto/Manual Switch Scaling Lower Limit 0 0 1 0 M 0 Wait Band off SP 4 Work Bit 2 OFF Delay M w4on w6on M sp-4 w3of al1l 0.0 M 0 M SP 3 0 w5of 1 M w3on 0 M SP 2 0 0 0 1.0 M w2of 0 M SP 1 0 sp-3 hys Work Bit 2 ON Delay M 0 1.0 M sp-2 Derivative Time (Cooling) M 0 sp-1 Integral Time (Cooling) M of-r w2on Process Value/ Set Point 2 0.0 M 50.0 M sp-0 c-db a-m Press the O Key for at least 3 s. M in-l Alarm Value Upper Limit 0 1 M 0 M 0 0.0 M hs2 Derivative Time Proportional Band 8.0 (Cooling) 233 M Work Bit 1 0 OFF Delay c-p c-i M w1of 40 M lcr2 Integral Time 233 d M Bit 1 w1on Work ON Delay 0 M M hs1 Proportional Band M 0 Dead Band 0.0 8.0 i 2.0 al1h 25 M db Position Proportional Remote SP Input Slope Coefficient M M lcr1 p 0.0 Process Value/ 0 Set Point 1 25 MV Change Rate Limit 0.8 M M hb2 rsrt orl M Extraction of Root sqrp Square Low-cut Point 0.0 M M M in-h Scaling Upper Limit 100 M oc-h Open/Close Hysteresis M Heater Burnout Detection 1 5 Remote SP Input Shift M M hb1 rss 1.000 M ct1 Process Value Slope Coefficient M M spmd inrt M M cmwt in-t Input Type Press the O Key less than 1 s. 1.000 off Press the O Key for less than 1 s. Operation Level ins Press the S Key*2 Initial Setting Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. M M Press the O Key for at least 3 s. Other than the Auto/Manual Switch display Starting in Automatic Mode. M bps Communications Unit No. Communications Baud Rate 9.6 7 2 M *3 area adrh 0 Communications Data Length adrl 0 M rwat 1000 M unit M M Communications even Parity Send Data Wait 20 Time M 0 M up13 0 M 31 First Address Upper Word M dn13 75 First Address Lower Word off Receive Data Wait Time *3 sps 1.000 Communications Node Number Upload Setting 1 Upload Setting 13 Download Setting 1 Download Setting 13 M copy M Communications Stop Bits 1 dn 1 M prty sdwt Area M M sbit maxu 0 M len Highest Communications 0 Unit No. M spos 0.0 Copy *3 SP Slope *3 SP Offset *3 M *1. When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M. *2. When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP. *3. Used with component communications. E5@C/E5@C-T Monitor/Setting Item Level 25 0 Monitor/Setting Item Display 1 S Monitor/Setting Item Display 2 S Monitor/Setting Item Display 3 Monitor/Setting Item Display 4 S S Monitor/Setting Item Display 5 Note: The monitor/setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level). Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level alt3 Alarm 3 Type 2 M alh3 0.2 Alarm 3 Hysteresis M alt4 Alarm 4 Type 2 M alh4 Alarm 4 0.2 Hysteresis M o1st Control Output 1 Signal 4-20 M o2st Control Output 2 Signal 4-20 M trst Transfer Output Signal 4-20 M tr-t Transfer Output Type off M tr-h 100.0 Transfer Output Upper Limit M Output tr-l Transfer Lower Limit init Parameter Initialization ret M mspu Number of Multi-SP M brgt M spru SP Ramp Time Unit M a1lt M Sequence rest Standby Reset M a2lt M sb1n Auxiliary Output 1 M a3lt M sb2n Auxiliary Output 2 M a4lt M Output 3 sb3n Auxiliary Open in Alarm M prlt off Points m a n-o Open in Alarm n-o Open in Alarm n-o M sb4n Auxiliary Output 4 Open in Alarm n-o M hbu HB ON/OFF on M a1on M a3on M st-b ST Stable Range M a4on M alfa M a1of M ev-2 stop Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 M Input ev-3 Event Assignment 3 none M ev-4 Event Input Assignment 4 none M Input ev-5 Event Assignment 5 none M ev-6 none M clfl Event Input Assignment 6 Close/Floating M calb Motor Calibration Travel Time 30 M of Square sqr Extraction Root Enable off M Move to Advanced Function Level: amov Setting Displayed when initial 0 15.0 0.65 setting/communications M protect is set to 0. Move to Protect Level Time Cold Junction Compensation M at-h AT Hysteresis M a4of 0.8 M lcma Limit Cycle MV 20.0 Amplitude Alarm 4 ON Delay M mav Moving Average Count M mant Alarm 1 OFF Delay Alarm 2 OFF Delay o Control Output 1 Assignment M Output 2 out2 Control Assignment sub1 Heating/Cooling Tuning Method off Minimum Output ON/OFF Band 1.0 M pf PF Setting shft M pfd1 Monitor/Setting Item 1 1 M Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment pfd2 Monitor/Setting Item 2 0 M Auxiliary Output 2 sub2 Assignment M pfd3 Monitor/Setting Item 3 M Output 3 sub3 Auxiliary Assignment M pfd4 Monitor/Setting Item 4 M Output 4 sub4 Auxiliary Assignment M pfd5 Monitor/Setting Item 5 M alma Integrated Alarm M No. 1 Display spd1 PV/SP Selection M t-u Soak Time Unit M PV/SP No. 2 Display spd2 Selection m M Alarm 4 OFF Delay PV Rate of Change Calculation Period 20 M ompw out1 Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV off M lbab LBA Band 3.0 Manual MV Limit Enable off M hctm 49 Assignment Alarm 3 OFF Delay 0 M lbal LBA Level alm4 (E5EC/E5AC only) alsp Alarm SP Selection sp-m 0 0 0 4 0 M MV Display Selection odsl o M Remote SP Input M PV Decimal Point pvdp Display MV at Stop and Error Addition rs-t Auto/Manual Select Addition M rspu Remote SP Enable M PV Status Display pvst Function M SP rsph Remote Upper Limit M Status Display svst SV Function M SP rspl Remote Lower Limit M Display Refresh d.ref Period Manual Output Method hold M mani M 0.0 M M pvrp alm3 M off M lba LBA Detection Time alm2 M amad M MV Display o-dp off M M Alarm 3 ON Delay 0 M inf Input Digital Filter M pmvd alm1 0 off M hsh HS Alarm Hysteresis M Alarm 2 ON Delay 0 mvse M manl none 0 M a3of 0.8 Alarm 1 ON Delay 0 M at-g AT Calculated Gain 1 Time Unit M hsl HS Alarm Latch M 0 M a2of M p-db PV Dead Band 8.0 0 M tidu Integral/Derivative off off M mot 0.1 0.0 flot Alarm 4 Latch 0 M Burnout hbh Heater Hysteresis off M hsu HS Alarm Use 0 M M Transfer o1tl Simple Ouptut 1 Lower Limit msp0 Alarm 3 Latch SP Tracking sptr off 0.1 M a2on ev-1 Alarm 2 Latch off cjc RT off off off M hbl Heater Burnout Latch 0.0 Alarm 1 Latch off 3 rt on off M Transfer o1th Simple Output 1 Upper Limit M Display Brightness 3 on Method 0.0 100.0 Automatic Display off Return Time off 4-20 off 1300 Manual MV Initial Value -200 M on off off 0.25 M Cooling Output lcmt LCT Minimum ON Time 0.2 M to Calibration cmov Move Level 0 M Move by setting password (-169). 117 E5@C/E5@C-T E5@C-T Some parameters may not be displayed depending on the model and other settings. Starting in manual mode Monitor/Setting Item Level 25 PF Monitor/ Power ON Manual Control Level 25 Setting Item 0 S PF Monitor/Setting Item display 2 to 5 display 1 * The monitor/setting items to display are set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (Advanced Function Setting Level). PV/Manual MV 50.0 Press S Key.*2 Press S Key.*2 Press O or S Key for at least 1 s.*1 Press O Key for at least 3 s while a-m is displayed. Press S Key for at least 1 s.*1 Program Setting Level U Operation Level d.prg 01 25 0 prgt Process Value/Set Point 1 0.00 M Elapsed Program Time Monitor M rptm 25 Process 0 Value/Set Point 2 0.00 ct1 Auto/Manual Switch 0.0 lcr1 r-r rst Hold o 0.0 M Segment Number c-o 0 0.0 Remaining Standby Time Monitor v-m 0.0 d.pid U M 1.i 233 PID 1 Integral Time 40 1.c-p 8.0 233 40 M 118 al1l PID 1 Integral Time (Cooling) Press O Key for less than 1 s. 0.0 PID 1 Dead Band 1.ofr 1.olh Alarm Lower Limit 1 to 4 1.oll 0.0 1.aut 1320 1.lba 0 M Adjustment Level Display Displayed only once when entering Adjustment Level. AT Execute/Cancel M cmwt 67 D M styp Segment n Format on1 0.00 sp Segment n SP 0 pr Segment n Slope 0 Time Signal 1 to 2 ON Time M of1 M M Time Signal 1 to 2 Set Segment Time Signal 1 to 2 OFF Time M time Segment n Time 0.00 M Press O Key for less than 1 s. lcr1 0.0 Leakage Current 1 to 2 Value Monitor 1.000 Heater Current 1 to 2 Value Monitor M wt-b d c-p Wait Band c-i M M Standby Time M c-d Integral Time (Cooling) Derivative Time (Cooling) 40 0.00 0 Proportional Band (Cooling) 8.0 M 233 psps Derivative Time M PV Input Slope Coefficient off stb Integral Time 40 M M Heater Burnout Detection 1 to 2 i M PV Input Shift M Fixed SP M 0.0 inrt Proportional Band 233 M SP Mode M hb1 ins p 8.0 M HS Alarm 1 to 2 0.0 M fsp hs1 M Communications Writing M spmd 0.0 PID 1 LBA Detection Time 0 50.0 off ct1 PID 1 Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit ts1s M at 0 PID 1 MV Lower Limit Program Link Destination end M psp PID 1 MV Upper Limit link M Alarm Upper Limit 1 to 4 45 ramp Adjustment Level off PID 1 Manual Reset Value 0 3 12 M M 1.cdb Program Repetitions 0.00 1234 M PID 1 Derivative Time (Cooling) Alarm Value 1 to 4 M Valve Opening Monitor rpt M M 0 M M 1.c-d al1h MV Monitor (Cooling) M M 1.c-i 0 l.adj 100.0 PID 1 Proportional Band (Cooling) PID Set No. M 0 M M For 0 to 7 al-1 Display PID Selection s0.0 PID 1 Derivative Time M M MV Monitor (Heating) 0 D 1 Run/Reset (of the program) M M 1.d For end pid M PID 1 Proportional Band d.seg end Leakage Current 1 to 2 Value Monitor Press O Key for less than 1 s. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D 8.0 U M PID Setting Level Press the U Key for at least 1 s in Program SP Mode. Display Segment Selection END or 0 to Number of segments used - 1 d.seg M M 1.p Number of Segments Used Process Value/Set Point 1 or Process Value/Set Point 2 in Operation Level U Heater Current 1 to 2 Value Monitor M M 0.00 8 M off stbm 0 M M Program Number 0 seg s-no 0.0 M hold 25 D M M Program No. Monitor/ Segment No. Monitor M prg Display Program Selection M M pgsg 7 0 M a-m Program Execution Repetitions Monitor Press O Key for less than 1 s. 23 6 45 Program SP Shift Value c-db 0.0 M Dead Band E5@C/E5@C-T Press O Key for at least 1 s. Protect Level Press O + M Key for at least 3 s. M pmov oapt 0 0 Operation/Adjustment Protect pfpt Initial Setting/ Communications Protect pmsk Setting Change Protect prlp M Move to Protect Level icpt Press O + M Key for at least 3 s. (The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter (Advanced Function Setting Level).) 1 M M 0 off Press O + M Key for at least 1 s. Parameter Mask Enable on M wtpt PF Key Protect off M Password to Move to Protect Level M Initial Setting Level Press O Key for at least 3 s. in-t Input Type Press O Key for at least 1 s. eset SP Lower Limit rst M M in-h Scaling Upper Limit t-u M M in-l Scaling Lower Limit 0 t-pr time M Step Time/Rate of Rise Programming Decimal Point 0 pru m M c Temperature Unit rtsm SP Upper Limit p-on 1300 M orev M M cntl All PID AT Upper Limit SP alt1 2 PID ON/OFF alh1 0.2 s-hc Standard or Heating/Cooling stnd stop o1st 4-20 M cp Startup Operation cont 20 M M trst 4-20 tr-l 0.0 ev-1 rr-1 mot Transfer Output Lower Limit vl-c Event Input Assignment 1 vl-o ev-2 Event Input Assignment 2 pms adv M ev-3 Event Input Assignment 3 to 6 sqr none Valve Completely Closed Position Valve Completely Open Position 9999 M Potentiometer Specification Setting 0 M Extraction of Square Root Enable off M M clfl 0 M M Transfer Output Signal Travel Time 30 M M Control output 1 to 2 Signal Motor Calibration off Transfer Output Upper Limit M Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis calb M M Alarm 1 to 4 Type M Control Period (Heating) tr-h 100.0 M M Reset Operation Transfer Output Type M Direct/Reverse Operation M pid M M sl-h PV Start tr-t off M M Time Unit of Ramp Rate Control Period (Cooling) 20 or-r 0 M d-u c-cp sp tspu M dp Operation End Operation M pvst Program Time Unit h-m 100 Press O Key for at least 3 s. sl-l -200 5 Close/Floating flot amov 0 Moves to Advanced Function Setting Level Enter password (-169) to move. M M Press O Key for less than 1 s. Communications Setting Level psel Protocol Setting Manual Reset Value M hys Hysteresis (Heating) Hysteresis (Cooling) MV at Reset M 0.0 sqrp Communications Baud Rate area len 7 Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point sbit 2 Work Bit 1 to 8 ON Delay w1of Work Bit 1 to 8 OFF Delay prty even M 0 Area dn 1 0 First Address Upper Word Communications Parity rwat Upload Setting 1 to 23 M copy Download Setting 1 to 43 Copy M off M adrl 0 M 0 Communications Stop Bits Communications Node Number M 0 adrh 0 up 1 M Communications Data Length unit Highest Communications Unit No. M First Address Lower Word M 0 M M w1on 0 100.0 M Open/Close Hysteresis M MV Upper Limit maxu M 0 M bps 9.6 M MV at PV Error 0.0 ol-l oc-h 0.0 M ol-h Position Proportional Dead Band M 0.0 Communications Unit No. M 0.8 M mv-e 1 M 1.0 u-no M db 2.0 M mv-r MV Change Rate Limit M 1.0 chys orl 0.0 50.0 Send Data Wait Time M M of-r sdwt 20 cwf Receive Data Wait Time 1000 M Models with communications only: Changes to settings are applied when the power is cycled or a software reset is performed. M MV Lower Limit plcm 0 M Communications Monitor *1 When PF Setting = A-M. *2 When PF Setting = PFDP. 119 E5@C/E5@C-T Advanced Function Setting Level init off Parameter Initialization mant Program End ON Time mani Standby Time Unit Standby Sequence Reset n-o Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 Open in Alarm hsh Heater Burnout Latch lba Heater Burnout Hysteresis Integral/Derivative Time Unit o 1 AT Calculated Gain none 0.8 M at-h alm1 M alm2 M 0.0 off alm3 Moving Average Count off Automatic Display Return Time Display Brightness Alarm 1 to 4 Latch Move to Protect Level Time Cold Junction Compensation Method Alarm 1 to 4 ON Delay 0 120 Integrated Alarm Assignment pidh 0.50 p-db Alarm 1 to 4 OFF Delay Alarm SP Selection SP Tracking PID Set Automatic Selection Data PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis PV Dead Band 0 manl off M up pmst Burnout Method Parameter Mask Setting off cmov 0 M M M 0 pv burn M M M M Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment M M a1of pidi Display Refresh Period 0.25 M M 3 a1on sptr d.ref M Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment off M on alsp SV Status Display Function off M Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment M off cjc 49 PV Status Display Function off M sp-m 3 prlt svst M M a1lt Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment alm4 alma PV/SP No. 2 Display Selection M M M brgt sub4 PV/SP No. 1 Display Selection 7 pvst M M ret sub3 spd2 Control Output 2 Assignment M Input Digital Filter M mav sub2 spd1 M Control Output 1 Assignment M Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 20.0 inf sub1 PF Monitor/ Setting Item 2 to 5 6 M AT Hysteresis 0.8 lcma out2 PF Monitor/Setting Item 1 M LBA Band M M at-g out1 pfd2 0 M M pfd1 M LBA Level 3.0 0.65 tidu lbab PF Setting 1 M M pf M LBA Detection Time 8.0 0.1 alfa lbal LCT Cooling Output Min. ON Time shft 0.1 M M Minimum Output ON/OFF Band M HS Alarm Hysteresis 0 off lcmt 0.2 M M hbh HS Alarm Latch off HB ON/OFF on hbl 1.0 M M hbu hsl ompw M M M Heating/Cooling Tuning Method M HS Alarm Use on a sb1n hsu hctm 0 M M PV Rate of Change Calculation Period M RT off h-m rest rt pvrp 20 M M s-u Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV M Manual MV Initial Value 0.0 0.0 pmvd off M M pend Manual Output Method hold Manual MV Limit Enable Move to Calibration Level E5@C/E5@C-T Error Displays (Troubleshooting) When an error occurs, the No. 1 display or No. 2 display shows the error code. Take necessary measure according to the error code, referring the following table. Display s.err Name Input error [[[[ Display range exceeded ]]]] Meaning The input value exceeded the control range.* The input type is not set correctly. The sensor is disconnected or shortcircuited. The sensor is not wired correctly. The sensor is not wired. * Control Range Temperature resistance thermometer or thermocouple input: SP Lower Limit - 20C to SP Upper Limit + 20C (SP Lower Limit - 40F to SP Upper Limit + 40F) ESIB input: Same as specified input range. Analog input: Scaling range -5% to 105% This is not an error. It is displayed when the Below -1,999 control range is wider than the display range and the PV exceeds the display range. The PV is displayed for the range that is Above 9,999 given on the left (the number without the decimal point). e333 A/D converter error There is an error in the internal circuits. e111 Memory error There is an error in the internal memory operation. Action Check the wiring for input to be sure it is wired correctly, not broken, and not shorted. Also check the input type. If there are no problems in the wiring or input type settings, cycle the power supply. If the display remains the same, replace the Digital Temperature Controller. If the display is restored to normal, then the probable cause is external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. Note: For a temperature resistance thermometer, the input is considered disconnected if the A, B, or B' line is broken. - After checking the input error, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the controller must be repaired. If the display is restored to normal, then a probable cause can be external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. First, cycle the power supply. If the display remains the same, the controller must be repaired. If the display is restored to normal, then a probable cause can be external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. ffff Overcurrent This error is displayed when the peak current exceeds 55.0 A. - ct1 ct2 lcr1 lcr2 HB or HS alarm If there is a HB or HS alarm, the No. 1 display will flash in the relevant setting level. - ---- "----" will be displayed for the Valve Opening Monitor parameter if any of the following error occurs. Potentiometer * Motor calibration has not been performed. Input Error * The wiring of the potentiometer is (Positionincorrect or broken. proportional Models Only) * The potentiometer input value is incorrect (e.g., the input is out of range or the potentiometer has failed). Check for the above errors. Operation After the error occurs and it is displayed, the alarm output will operate as if the upper limit was exceeded. It will also operate as if transfer output exceeded the upper limit. If an input error is assigned to a control output or auxiliary output, the output will turn ON when the input error occurs. The error message will appear in the display for the PV. Note: 1. The heating and cooling control outputs will turn OFF. 2. When the manual MV, MV at stop, MV at reset, or MV at error is set, the control output is determined by the set value. Control continues and operation is normal. The value will appear in the display for the PV. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) or the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for information on the controllable range. The control outputs, auxiliary outputs, and transfer outputs turn OFF. (A current output will be approx. 0 mA and a linear voltage output will be approx. 0V.) The control outputs, auxiliary outputs, and transfer outputs turn OFF. (A current output will be approx. 0 mA and a linear voltage output will be approx. 0V.) Control continues and operation is normal. The error message will appear for the following displays. Heater Current Value 1 Monitor Heater Current Value 2 Monitor Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor Leakage Current Value 2 Monitor The No. 1 display for the following parameter flashes in Operation Level or Adjustment Level. Heater Current Value 1 Monitor Heater Current Value 2 Monitor Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor Leakage Current Value 2 Monitor However, control continues and operation is normal. Close control: The control output is OFF or the value that is set for the MV at PV Error parameter is output. Floating control: Operation will be normal. 121 E5@C/E5@C-T Safety Precautions Be sure to read the precautions for all E5@C/E5@C-T models in the website at: http://www.ia.omron.com/. Warning Indications CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage. Precautions for Safe Use Supplementary comments on what to do or avoid doing, to use the product safely. Precautions for Correct Use Supplementary comments on what to do or avoid doing, to prevent failure to operate, malfunction or undesirable effect on product performance. Meaning of Product Safety Symbols Used to warn of the risk of electric shock under specific conditions. Used for general prohibitions for which there is no specific symbol. Used to indicate prohibition when there is a risk of minor injury from electrical shock or other source if the product is disassembled. Used for general CAUTION, WARNING, or DANGER precautions for which there is no specified symbol. (This symbol is also used as the alerting symbol, but shall not be used in this meaning on the product.) Used for general mandatory action precautions for which there is no specified symbol. CAUTION Minor electric shock or fire may occasionally occur. Do not use any cables that are damaged. Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur. CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock 1. This product is UL listed *1 as Open Type Process Control Equipment. It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally. 2. More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the equipment before servicing the product. 3. Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. *2 4. Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits. *3 If the output relays are used past their life expectancy, contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur. Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions. Even if you replace only the Main Unit of the E5DC/ E5DC-B, check the condition of the Terminal Unit. If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Digital Temperature Controller to increase, possibly resulting in fire. If the terminals are corroded, replace the Terminal Unit as well. Tighten the terminal screws to the rated torque of between 0.43 and 0.58 N*m. *4 Loose screws may occasionally result in fire. Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock. Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled. If they are not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents. Electric shock may occur. Do not touch any cables or connectors with wet hands. A malfunction in the product may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs, resulting in property damage. To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the product, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line. Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur. Do not allow any metal, conductors, chips from mounting work, or water to enter the interior of the Digital Controller, the Setting Tool port, or between the pins on the Setting Tool cable connector. If you do not use the Setting Tool port on the front panel, close the cover securely so that the above foreign matter does not enter. Do not use the Digital Temperature Controller where subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise, minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur. Not doing so may occasionally result in fire. Do not allow dirt or other foreign objects to enter the Setup Tool port or ports, or between the pins on the connectors on the Setup Tool cable. 122 *1. E5CC, E5EC, E5AC, and E5DC Digital Temperature Controllers that were shipped through November 2013 are UL recognized. *2. An SELV (separated extra-low voltage) system is one with a power supply that has double or reinforced insulation between the primary and the secondary circuits and has an output voltage of 30 V r.m.s. max. and 42.4 V peak max. or 60 VDC max. *3. A class 2 circuit is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels. *4. The specified torque is 0.5 N*m for the E5CC-U. E5@C/E5@C-T Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction or adverse affects on the performance or functionality of the product. Not doing so may occasionally result in faulty operation. Do not handle the Digital Temperature Controller in ways that exceed the ratings. 1. This product is specifically designed for indoor use only. Do not use this product in the following places: * Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment. * Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere. * Places subject to direct sunlight. * Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas). * Places subject to intense temperature change. * Places subject to icing and condensation. * Places subject to vibration and large shocks. 2. Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature and humidity. Gang-mounting two or more Digital Temperature Controllers, or mounting Digital Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Digital Temperature Controllers, which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers. 3. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the Digital Temperature Controller. Do not block the ventilation holes on the Digital Temperature Controller. 4. Be sure to wire properly with correct signal name and polarity of terminals. 5. Use copper stranded or solid wires to connect bare wires. Recommended Wire Model Wire Size E5CC/E5EC/ E5AC/E5DC/ E5@C-T/E5GC (Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks) Wire Stripping length 6 to 8 mm AWG24 to AWG18 (0.21 to 0.82mm2 ) E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks) 8 to 12 mm E5CC-U (Plug-in model) AWG24 to 14 (0.21 to 2.08mm2 ) 5 to 6 mm E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) 0.25 to 1.5mm2 Equivalent to AWG24 to 16 Ferrules used: 10 mm *1 Ferrules not used: 8 mm *1. Please use Ferrules with UL certification (R/C). Use the specified size of crimped terminals to wire the E5CC, E5EC, E5AC, E5DC, and E5GC (models with screw terminal blocks) and the E5@C-T and E5CC-U (plug-in models). Recommended Crimped Terminal Size Model Wire Size E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5@C-T/ E5GC (Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks) M3, Width: 5.8 mm max. E5CC-U (Plug-in model) M3.5, Width: 7.2 mm max. For the E5@C-B(Push-In Plus model), connect only one wire to each terminal. For other models, up to two wires of same size and type, or two crimp terminals, can be inserted into a single terminal. When connecting two wires to one terminal on an E5GC Digital Temperature Controller with a screwless clamp terminal blocks, use two crimped ferrules with a diameter of 0.8 to 1.4 mm and an exposed conductor length of 8 to 12 mm. *2 *2. The E5GC Digital Temperature Controller with screwless clamp terminal blocks underwent UL testing with one braided wire connected. 6. Do not wire the terminals that are not used. 7. Use a commercial power supply for the power supply voltage input to a Digital Temperature Controller with AC input specifications. Do not use the output from an inverter as the power supply. Depending on the output characteristics of the inverter, temperature increases in the Digital Temperature Controller may cause smoke or fire damage even if the inverter has a specified output frequency of 50/60 Hz. 8. To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the product's terminal block away from power cables carry high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to product wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils, or other equipment that have an inductance component). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the product. Allow as much space as possible between the product and devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge. 9. Use this product within the rated load and power supply. 10.Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact. If the voltage is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur. 11.Make sure that the Digital Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display. 12.When executing self-tuning with E5@C, turn ON power to the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the product. If power is turned ON to the product before turning ON power to the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. 13.A switch or circuit breaker must be provided close to the product. The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit. 14.Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the product carefully. Do not use organic solvent, such as paint thinner, benzine or alcohol to clean the product. 15.Design the system (e.g., control panel) considering the 2 seconds of delay that the product's output to be set after power ON. 16.The output may turn OFF when you move to the initial setting level. Take this into consideration when performing control operations. 17.The number of non-volatile memory write operations is limited. Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data during communications or other operations. 18.Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Digital Temperature Controller to discharge static electricity from your body. 19.Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Temperature Controller apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Digital Temperature Controller may cause injury. 20.For compliance with Lloyd's standards, the E5CC, E5CC-B, E5EC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5AC, and E5DC must be installed under the conditions that are specified in Shipping Standards. 21.For the Digital Temperature Controller with two Setup Tool ports (E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5DC/E5DC-B/E5GC), do not connect cables to both ports at the same time. The Digital Temperature Controller may be damaged or may malfunction. 22.Do not place heavy object on the Conversion Cable, bend the cable past its natural bending radius, or pull on the cable with undue force. The Digital Temperature Controller may be damaged. 123 E5@C/E5@C-T 23.Do not disconnect the Communications Conversion Cable or the USB-Serial Conversion Cable while communications are in progress. Damage or malfunction may occur. 24.Do not touch the external power supply terminals or other metal parts on the Digital Temperature Controller. 25.Do not exceed the communications distance that is given in the specifications and use the specified communications cable. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174) for information on the communications distances and cables for the E5@C. For details on the E5@C-T, refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185). 26.Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending radius. Do not pull on the communications cables. 27.Do not turn the power supply to the Digital Temperature Controller ON or OFF while the USB-Serial Conversion Cable is connected. The Digital Temperature Controller may malfunction. 28.Make sure that the indicators on the USB-Serial Conversion Cable are operating properly. Depending on the application conditions, deterioration in the connectors and cable may be accelerated, and normal communications may become impossible. Perform periodic inspection and replacement. 29.Connectors may be damaged if they are inserted with excessive force. When connecting a connector, always make sure that it is oriented correctly. Do not force the connector if it does not connect smoothly. 30.Noise may enter on the USB-Serial Conversion Cable, possibly causing equipment malfunctions. Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected constantly to the equipment. 31.For the E5DC/E5DC-B, when you attach the Main Unit to the Terminal Unit, make sure that the hooks on the Main Unit are securely inserted into the Terminal Unit. 32.For the E5CC-U, when you attach the Main Unit to the socket, make sure that the hooks on the socket are securely inserted into the Main Unit. 33.Install the DIN Track vertically to the ground. 34.For the E5DC/E5DC-B, always turn OFF the power supply before connecting the Main Unit to or disconnecting the Main Unit from the Terminal Unit, and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components. When connecting or disconnecting the Main Unit, do not allow the electronic components to touch the case. 35.Observe the following precautions when you remove the terminal block or pulling out the interior of the product of the E5GC. * Always follow the instructions provided in the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual (Cat. No. H174). * Turn OFF the power supply before you start and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electric components. When you insert the interior body of the Digital Temperature Controller, do not allow the electronic components to touch the case. * Check for any corrosion on the terminals. * When you insert the interior body into the rear case, confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case. 36.Observe the following precautions when you wire the E5@C-B. * Always follow the wiring instructions provided in Wiring Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) on page 133. * Do not wire anything to the release holes. * Do not tilt or twist a flat-blade screwdriver while it is inserted into a release hole on the terminal block. The terminal block may be damaged. * Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the release holes at an angle. The terminal block may be damaged if you insert the screwdriver straight in. * Do not allow the flat-blade screwdriver to fall out while it is inserted into a release hole. * Do not bend a wire past its natural bending radius or pull on it with excessive force. Doing so may cause the wire to break. * Do not use crossover wiring except for the input power supply and communications. * Do not use crossover wiring for the E5CC-B/E5EC-B except for the input power supply and communications. Do not use crossover wiring for the E5DC-B. 124 Shipping Standards The E5CC, E5CC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5EC-B, E5AC, and E5DC comply with Lloyd's standards. When applying the standards, the following installation requirements must be met in the application. Also insert the Waterproof Packing on the backside of the front panel. Application Conditions Installation Location The E5CC, E5CC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5EC-B, E5AC, and E5DC comply with installation category ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd's standards. Therefore, they must be installed in a location equipped with air conditioning. They cannot be used on the bridge or decks, or in a location subject to strong vibration. Precautions for Correct Use Service Life 1. Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges: Temperature: -10 to 55C (with no icing or condensation) Humidity: 25% to 85% If the product is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55C, including the temperature around the product. 2. The service life of electronic devices like Digital Temperature Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components. Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Digital Temperature Controller. 3. When two or more Digital Temperature Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another, the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Digital Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers. When providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors. E5@C/E5@C-T Measurement Accuracy 1. When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types. 2. When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same. 3. Mount the product so that it is horizontally level. 4. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has been set correctly. 5. Wiring When linking the units together, connect the power cable only to the unit at the left end of the linkage block. Incorrect wiring can be shorted inside the unit resulting in damage to the unit. Do not perform crossover wiring between each linkage block, or to another device. This could result in a breakdown or incorrect operation. Prohibited Multiplex Power Input Wirin Prohibited Crossover Wiring Waterproofing (Not applicable to the E5CC-U/ E5DC/E5DC-B.) The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any specification on their degree of protection or those with IP@0 are not waterproof. Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00 When waterproofing is required, insert the Waterproof Packing on the backside of the front panel. Keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port of the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T securely closed. The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used is IP66. To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. The replacement period will vary with the operating environment. Check the required period in the actual application. Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline. Operating Precautions 1. When using self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, selftuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. When starting operation after the Digital Temperature Controller has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning the Digital Temperature Controller OFF and ON again, switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.) 2. Avoid using the Digital Temperature Controller in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installing. These devices can cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance of the Controller. Others 1. Do not Connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable connector repeatedly over a short period of time. The computer may malfunction. 2. After connecting the Conversion Cable to the computer, check the COM port number before starting communications. The computer requires time to recognize the cable connection. This delay does not indicate failure. 3. Do not connect the Conversion Cable through a USB hub. Doing so may damage the Conversion Cable. 4. Do not use an extension cable to extend the Conversion Cable length when connecting to the computer. Doing so may damage the Conversion Cable. Incorrect Incorrect 6. When N units are linked together, the inrush current will be equal to N times that for 1 unit. Be sure to use the external fuse with the appropriate fusing characteristics, and the breaker with the appropriate tripping characteristics to ensure that the fuse does not melt and the breaker is not activated due to the inrush current. The inrush current per Unit is 30 A or less. 7. Do not remove the connector cover from connectors that are not to be linked. The connector covers have been mounted on the product during shipment. 8. Do not add or separate the units during power-on. Mounting Mounting to a Panel E5GC Adapter Waterproof Packing Panel 1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers. 2. Insert the E5GC into the mounting hole in the panel. 3. Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left. 4. Push the Adapters from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5GC. 5. Tighten the two fastening screws on the Adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N*m. 125 E5@C/E5@C-T E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T E5DC/E5DC-B * E5CC/E5CC-T There are two models of Terminal Covers that you can use with the E5CC/E5CC-T. Terminal Cover (E53-COV17) (Sold separately) Adapter Adapter Panel Terminal Cover (E53-COV23) Terminal Unit Main Unit Water Proof Packing Panel * E5CC-U For the Wiring Socket for the E5CC-U, purchase the P2CF-11 or PG3A-11 separately. 1. Insert the E5DC/E5DC-B into the mounting hole in the panel. (Attach the Terminal Unit after you insert the Main Unit.) 2. Push the Adapter from the Terminal Unit up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5DC/E5DC-B. 3. Tighten the two fastening screws on the Adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N*m. E5DC Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track 1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers. The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof Packing is inserted. 2. Insert the E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T into the mounting hole in the panel. 3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T. 4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N*m. E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T Adapter 2. Catch the top hook on the DIN Track. 3. Press the Unit onto the DIN Track. 1. Pull down the hook. Panel Adapter Terminal Cover (E53-COV24) Terminal Cover (E53-COV24) Water Proof Packing 1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers. 2. Insert the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T into the mounting hole in the panel. 3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T. 4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N*m. 126 * Mounting a Unit Pull down the DIN Track hook on the Terminal Unit and catch the top hook on the DIN Track. Press the Unit onto the DIN Track until the DIN Track hooks are locked in place. 4. Make sure that the hooks are locked in place. * Removing a Unit Pull down on the DIN Track Hook with a flat-blade screwdriver and lift up the Unit. E5@C/E5@C-T Removing the Main Unit Removing the Main Unit Press in the two hooks on the Main Unit and remove the Main Unit from the Terminal Unit. (1) (1) (2) Pull out the Main Unit. (2) (1) Push in the hooks. (1) End Plate Installation Make sure to attach PFP-M End Plates to the ends of the Units. End Plate Installation Make sure to attach PFP-M End Plates to the ends of the Units. (2) B (1) A Individual Mounting Individual Mounting Group Mounting E5DC-B Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track * Mounting a Unit Mount the Main Unit after first mounting the Terminal Unit on the DIN Track. Group Mounting Mounting to a DIN Track in Connection 1. Remove the connector cover on the side to use for connecting to another terminal unit, and attach the unit to the DIN Track. 2. Connect the terminal unit connector to the next unit. Connector Cover (Accessory) End Plate (2) Catch the top hook on the DIN Track. (2) Left side (1) 3. Wire the terminal units. 4. Insert the main units into the terminal units. (3) Press the Unit onto the DIN Track. (1) Pull down the hook. (4) Make sure that the hooks are locked in place. (3) * Removing a Unit Pull down on the DIN Track Hook with a flat-blade screwdriver and lift up the Unit. (4) 127 E5@C/E5@C-T Removing from the DIN Track 1. Remove the Main Unit from the Terminal Unit. 2. Remove the Terminal Units. 5. Insert the main unit into the mounting hole in the panel, and then mount the terminal unit. (4) (5) (2) (1) 3. Remove the Terminal Units from the DIN Track. 6. Push the adapter from the terminal unit side until it comes into contact with the panel to temporarily secure the unit, and then tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N*m. (6) Adapter (3) Adapter Mounting to a Panel in Connection 1. Insert the main unit into the mounting hole in the panel. 2. Mount the previously rewired terminal unit to the main unit. 3. Push the adapter from the terminal unit side until it comes into contact with the panel to temporarily secure the unit, and then tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N*m. Adapter (6) Removing from the Mounting Panel 1. Remove the Adapter attached to the Main Unit. Adapter (3) (1) (2) Mounting panel (1) Adapter Adapter (3) 4. On the wired terminal unit, remove the connector cover on the side to use for connection to another terminal unit, and then connect the units together. 128 (1) E5@C/E5@C-T Attaching the Connector Cover E5DC-B For male connector covers 2. Remove the Main Unit from the Terminal Unit. 1. Press on the connector cover until it clicks into place. There is no vertical direction for male connector covers. (1) (2) For female connector covers 3. Remove the Terminal Units. 1. Insert the projecting part on the female connector cover into the groove on the terminal unit. Projection Part (1) Groove 2. Press on the female connector cover until it clicks into place in the cutout. (2) Cutout (3) Mounting the DIN Track Removing the Connector Cover E5DC-B 1. For both male and female covers, insert the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver into the cutout on the connector cover to remove the connector cover. Attach the DIN Track to the inside of the control panel with screws to at least three locations. * DIN Track (sold separately) PFP-50N (50 cm) and PFP-100N (100 cm) Male connector cover Install the DIN Track vertically to the ground. Cutout Female connector cover Vertical: OK Horizontal: NG Cutout 129 E5@C/E5@C-T Mounting the Terminal Cover E5CC/E5CC-T Attaching the End Cover E5DC/E5DC-B Slightly bend the E53-COV23 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction. E53-COV17 Terminal Cover can be also attached. Make sure that the "UP" mark is facing up, and then attach the E53COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Digital Temperature Controller. 1. Install the E5DC/E5DC-B in a panel. E53-COV17 E53-COV23 2. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape on the End Cover. Adapter Terminal Cover (E53-COV17) (Sold separately) Enlarged illustration of Terminal Section E5EC/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T Slightly bend the E53-COV24 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction. Double-sided tape 3. Align the tabs on the End Cover with the depressions on the E5DC/E5DC-B and attach the End Cover. Slightly bend the E53-COV24 Terminal Cover in the direction shown by the arrows to attach it to the terminal block. Enlarged illustration of the terminal part 4. Secure the End Cover so that the double-sided tape is firmly attached. 130 E5@C/E5@C-T Removing the Digital Temperature Controller from the case E5GC Removing the draw-out jig when only one hook is caught in the draw-out jig insertion hole You can use the Y92F-55 Draw-out Jig to remove the interior body of the Digital Temperature Controller from the case to perform maintenance without removing the terminal wiring. This is possible only for the E5GC. Check the specifications of the case and Digital Temperature Controller before removing the Digital Temperature Controller from the case. 1. Pull the Draw-out Jig slowly in the direction shown in the figure. (This step is the same even if the other hook is caught.) 2. Confirm that the Draw-out jig is free of the Draw-out jig insertion hole. 3. If the interior body separates from the rear case, slowly press the interior body into the rear case in a horizontal direction. 1. Draw out the interior body from the rear case. 1. Slowly insert the Draw-out Jig into the Draw-out Jig insertion holes laterally until it clicks into place. (There is a hole at both the top and bottom.) (If you attempt to draw out the interior body of the Digital Controller when only one hook is engaged, the Digital Controller may be damaged.) If you do not follow the procedures above, the Digital Controller may be damaged. (2) (1) (3) Rear case Draw-out Jig insertion holes Front panel Precautions when Wiring Draw-out Jig (1) Hook (2) (1) Draw-out Jig insertion holes * Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise. * Use crimp terminals when wiring the screw terminal blocks. * Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals. * Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.43 to 0.58 N*m. The specified torque is 0.5 N*m for the E5CC-U. 2. Pull out the Draw-out Jig together with the front panel. Do not pull with excessive force. Slowly pull out the Digital Controller laterally. (If you pull the interior body out at an angle, the Digital Controller may be damaged.) 3. After the interior body is free from the rear case, support the interior body with one hand and draw it out slowly in a horizontal direction. E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5@C-T/E5GC (Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks) and E5CC-U (Plug-in model) 2. Insert the new interior body into the rear case. Use the wire sizes and stripping lengths given in the following table. 1. When inserting the interior body back into the rear case, make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, mount the sealing rubber, and press the interior body toward the rear case and into position, making sure that the sealing rubber does not move. 2. When you press the Digital Controller into position, press down on the rear case hooks so that the case hooks securely lock in place. (There are rear case hooks at both the top and bottom of the rear case.) If the Digital Controller is not correctly mounted into the rear case, the rear case may not be waterproof. When inserting the Digital Controller, do not allow the electronic components to touch the rear case. Top View Rear case hooks Sealing rubber position PCBs Wire Size Model Wire Size Stripping length E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/ E5DC/E5GC (Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks) / E5@C-T AWG24 to AWG18 (0.21 to 0.82 mm2) 6 to 8 mm (without crimp terminals) E5CC-U AWG24 to AWG14 (0.21 to 2.08 mm2) 5 to 6 mm (without crimp terminals) * If you use crimp terminals, use the stripping length that is recommended by the manufacturer of the crimp terminals. * To reduce the affects of noise, use shielded twisted-pair cable for the signal lines. (1) Case hooks * Make sure that the top and bottom PCBs are parallel to each other and insert them into the rear case. (2) Rear case hooks (2) 131 E5@C/E5@C-T Crimp Terminal For the E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5GC (Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks) or E5@C-T, use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 screws. 5.8 mm max. E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks) 1. Connection Method for Screwless Clamp Terminals The same method is used to connect stranded wires, solid wires, and ferrules. Part Names of the Terminal Block Terminal (Insertion) hole 5.8 mm max. Although you can connect two crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to one terminal, you cannot do so if the diameter of the insulation sleeves is too large. Select a crimp terminal that can be tightened as shown below. (Excluding the E5CC-U) E5CC, E5EC, E5AC, or E5@C-T Pusher E5GC or E5DC Note: Be careful in the tightening direction, as the terminal block is at an angle. Connection Method 1. Press the pusher with a flat-blade screwdriver. 2. With the screwdriver still pressing the pusher, insert the wire into the terminal (Insertion) hole. 3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the pusher. (2) Some terminal blocks have a large crimp part. In this case, bend the terminal in advance as shown in the figure, and tighten slowly to ensure that the terminal screw is vertical to the terminal surface of the terminal block. For the E5CC-U, use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5 screws. (1) (3) Checking Connections * After insertion, pull gently on the wire to make sure that it will not come out (i.e., to confirm that it is held by the terminal block). 7.2 mm max. 7.2 mm max. * If you use crimp terminals for the E5DC, use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves. If you use a bare crimp terminal with no insulation, the terminal may short with the terminal above or below it. If you use bare crimp terminals, cover the crimped sections with insulating marking tubes. Secure the marking tubes so that they do not move. NA 2. Removal Method for Screwless Clamp Terminals The same method is used to remove stranded wires, solid wires, and ferrules. 1. Press the pusher with a flat-blade screwdriver. 2. With the screwdriver still pressing the pusher, pull the wire out of the terminal (Insertion) hole. 3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the pusher. OK Recommended Crimp Terminals with Insulation Sleeves for the E5DC Manufacturer J.S.T. Mfg. Co. Model number (2) V1.25-B3A V0.5-3A (3) (1) 132 E5@C/E5@C-T 3. Recommended Wire Size and Ferrules Wire Size Use the wire sizes and stripping lengths given in the following table. Wire Size Stripping length AWG24 to AWG18 (0.21 to 0.82 mm2) 8 to 12 mm E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) 1. Connecting Wires to the Push-In Plus Terminal Block Part Names of the Terminal Block E5DC-B E5CC-B/EC-B Ferrules Terminal (Insertion) hole Release hole Ferrules must be 0.8 to 1.4 mm in diameter. The exposed conductor inserted into the terminal must be 8 to 12 mm in length. Release hole Terminal (Insertion) hole Connecting Wires with Ferrules and Solid Wires 0.8 to 1.4mm Insert the solid wire or ferrule straight into the terminal block until the end touches the terminal block. E5CC-B/EC-B E5DC-B 8 to 12mm Ferrules and Solid Wires Ferrules and Solid Wires Recommended ferrules Manufacturer name Altech Corp. 2623.0 Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. AVA-0.5 J.S.T. Mfg. Co. TUB-0.5 Single (1 wire) Nichifu Co., Ltd. Double (2 wires) If a wire is difficult to connect because it is too thin, use a flat-blade screwdriver in the same way as when connecting stranded wire. Model number TGNTC-1.25-9T TGVTC-1.25-11T TGNTC-1.25-11T TC0.3-9.5 TC1.25-11S-ST TC1.25-11S TC2-11S TGWVTC-1.25-9T TGWVTC-1.25-11T If a wire is difficult to connect because it is too thin, use a flat-blade screwdriver in the same way as when connecting stranded wire. Connecting Stranded Wires Use the following procedure to connect the wires to the terminal block. 1. Hold a flat-blade screwdriver at an angle and insert it into the release hole. The angle should be between 10 and 15. If the flat-blade screwdriver is inserted correctly, you will feel the spring in the release hole. 2. With the flat-blade screwdriver still inserted into the release hole, insert the wire into the terminal hole until it strikes the terminal block. 3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the release hole. E5CC-B/EC-B (2) Flat-blade screwdriver (1) 10 to 15 (3) E5DC-B Side view of the product (2) (1) 10 to 15 30 Flat-blade screwdriver (3) Side view of the product Checking Connections * After the insertion, pull gently on the wire to make sure that it will not come off and the wire is securely fastened to the terminal block. * To prevent short circuits, insert stripped part of a stranded or solid wire or the conductor part of a ferrule until it is hidden inside the terminal insertion hole. (See the following diagram.) 133 E5@C/E5@C-T 2. Removing Wires from the Push-In Plus Terminal Block Recommended Flat-blade Screwdriver Use the following procedure to remove wires from the terminal block. The same method is used to remove stranded wires, solid wires, and ferrules. 1. Hold a flat-blade screwdriver at an angle and insert it into the release hole. 2. With the flat-blade screwdriver still inserted into the release hole, remove the wire from the terminal insertion hole. 3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the release hole. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to connect and remove wires. Use the following flat-blade screwdriver. The following table shows manufacturers and models as of 2015/Dec. Side Front 2.5 mm dia. E5CC-B/EC-B (2) 0.4 mm (1) Flat-blade screwdriver Model 10 to 15 (3) E5DC-B Side view of the product (2) (1) 10 to 15 30 (3) Flat-blade screwdriver Side view of the product 3. Recommended Ferrules and Crimp Tools Recommended ferrules Applicable wire mm2 AWG Ferrule Conductor length (mm) Recommended ferrules Manufactured by Phoenix Contact Manufactured by Weidmuller Manufactured by Wago 0.25 24 8 AI0.25-8 H0.25/12 FE-0.25-8N-YE 0.34 22 8 AI0.34-8 H0.34/12 FE-0.34-8N-TQ 0.5 20 8 AI0.5-8 H0.5/14 FE-0.5-8N-WH 0.75 18 8 AI0.75-8 H0.75/14 FE-0.75-8N-GY 1 18 8 AI1-8 H1.0/14 FE-1.0-8N-RD 1.5 16 8 AI1.5-8 H1.5/14 FE-1.5-8N-BK Recommended crimp tool CRIMPFOX6 CRIMPFOX6T-F PZ6 roto CRIMPFOX10S Variocrimp4 Note: 1. Make sure that the outer diameter of the wire coating is smaller than the inner diameter of the insulation sleeve of the recommended ferrule. 2. Make sure that the ferrule processing dimensions conform to the following figures. 8 mm 2.1 mm max. 134 2.5 mm 2.7 mm max. Manufacturer ESD 0,402,5 Wera SZS 0,42,5 SZF 0-0,42,5 * Phoenix Contact 0.42.575 302 Wiha AEF.2,575 Facom 210-719 Wago SDIS 0.42.575 Weidmuller 9900 (-2.575) Vessel * OMRON's exclusive purchase model XW4Z-00B is available to order as SZF 0-0,4 x 2,5 (manufactured by Phoenix Contact). E5@C/E5@C-T Three-year Guarantee Period of Guarantee The guarantee period of the Unit is three years starting from the date the Unit is shipped from the factory. Scope of Guarantee The Unit is guaranteed under the following operating conditions. 1. Average Operating Temperature (see note): -10C to 50C 2. Mounting Method: Standard mounting (Mounted to panel or DIN Track.) Top Bottom Example: Mounted to Panel Note: Average Operating Temperature Refer to the process temperature of the Unit mounted to a control panel and connected to peripheral devices on condition that the Unit is in stable operation, sensor input type K is selected for the Unit, the positive and negative thermocouple input terminals of the Unit are short-circuited, and the ambient temperature is stable. Should the Unit malfunction during the guarantee period, OMRON shall repair the Unit or replace any parts of the Unit at the expense of OMRON. 135 MEMO 136 Terms and Conditions Agreement Read and understand this catalog. Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron's exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. (b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron's sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron's election, to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron's analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information. Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer's application or use of the Product. At Buyer's request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer's application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof. Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron's test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron's Warranty and Limitations of Liability. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron's representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product. Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions. OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor: Kyoto, JAPAN Contact: www.ia.omron.com Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200 Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A. Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967 Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 (c) OMRON Corporation 2011-2019 All Rights Reserved. In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. CSM_14_11_0619 Cat. No. H177-E1-12 0319 (1111)